JP2017148357A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To improve the interest of a game in a game machine. SOLUTION: In a gaming machine, a winning area which is provided in a gaming area and allows a game ball to win without any condition, and a gaming ball which is provided in the gaming area and operates when a predetermined condition is satisfied to allow a gaming ball to win. When the variable winning device and the game ball wins the prize area or the variable winning device, the payout control means capable of paying out the number of prize balls defined for each of the winning area and the variable winning device, Counting means for counting the number of discharged balls, which is the number of game balls discharged from the game area, and display means capable of displaying the ratio of the total number of prize balls obtained by the winning to the number of discharged balls, Prepare [Selection diagram] Figure 2D

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game and generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a predetermined result.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine having a general winning opening in which a gaming ball can be won without any particular condition (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-167245 A

  However, even if a prize is awarded to the general prize opening, only the winning ball is paid out, and the player's interest in the prize opening is not high, and the interest has not been improved.

  An object of the present invention is to increase the interest of a game in a gaming machine by making a player also interested in a general prize opening.

  In a typical embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game and capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a predetermined result, the game machine is provided in the gaming area. A winning area in which a game ball can be won without conditions, a variable winning device that is provided in the gaming area and that can operate when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the game ball can be won, and the gaming ball is in the winning area Alternatively, when winning the variable winning device, the payout control means capable of paying out the number of prize balls determined for each of the winning area and the variable prize winning device, and the total number of the paid out winning balls, Display means capable of displaying a ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by winning the variable prize winning device.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, a player can be interested in a general winning opening, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a discharge ball number display part. The display mode of the payout rate display unit will be described. A display mode of the accessory ratio display unit will be described. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the presentation control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an input process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a table which shows the priority order of winning-port monitoring. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the modification of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fraud & winning prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning number counter update process. It is a figure explaining the discharge ball number area | region, the acquired ball number area | region, and the earned ball number area | region classified by accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the appearance performance monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation | variation start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability variation frequency update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of effect mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process setting process 1 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 in the small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the middle hit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit remaining ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit | ending process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fluctuation | variation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric power residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end process per common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the example of a layout of the display screen of a display apparatus. It is a reverse view of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the payout command (payout number command) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a reverse view of the gaming machine according to another embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions viewed from the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be freely opened and closed through a hinge. The open / close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 is visible.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30. Can do.

  Various frame constituent members are disposed on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  In the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of producing a light emission according to the gaming state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members disposed inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  Upper speakers 19a are respectively disposed in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

  On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is disposed. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress of the game. The illumination member disposed inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

  The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate.

  When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or to execute a notice effect in advance for notifying the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when the variable display game is simply used, in this specification, the special figure variable display game is indicated.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being executed, but also when the player operates the effect operation device during non-execution.

  Note that the gaming state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special gaming state is, for example, a state where a specific game state is a short-time state or a state where a probability of a special result (for example, big hit) is high (probability change state, probability change state), big hit state (special game state) ), A small hit gaming state (small hit state).

  Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number-of-times type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

  In addition, whether or not to generate a probable change state is not determined by the big hit symbol random number, it is possible to always generate a probable change state when a big hit occurs, or provide a winning device equipped with a specific area, etc. The probability variation state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

  The ball lending operation device is an operation device that is operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used when discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which a balance such as a prepaid card is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 houses an illumination member such as an LED and performs a light emission effect or the like according to the gaming state, and is provided at the front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball launching device can change the launching force (speed) at which the game ball is launched into the game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and can play the game in various launching modes having different firing forces. Can fire a ball. The firing mode includes left-handed (normal hit) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right-handed in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower plate 23 is disposed below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval with respect to the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 includes a ball punching hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball punching hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a plate-like game board main body 30a serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At the approximate center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window portion serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 (display means) is provided as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of identification information. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and identification information (special symbols) and characters that produce a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image based on the progress of the game (a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  The center case 40 has an inlet 40a to the warp passage 40c for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40c can roll. Part 40b. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, the game balls that roll on the stage portion 40b enter the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. It is easier to win.

  An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The top effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided inside the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, the usual figure variation display game is executed.

  A general winning opening 35 (general winning area) is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of game balls in the general winning opening 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35 a to 35 n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35. In the present embodiment, there are two winning port switches 35 a for the left general winning port 35 and a winning port switch 35 b for the right general winning port 35.

  The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening (first start winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game, and a second start winning opening (second A normal variation winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is converted into a state in which a game ball easily flows by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball is prevented from winning the normal variation winning device 37. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure changing display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  The movable member 37b is a so-called velo-type ordinary electric accessory, and is rotated via a general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal-variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. And the game ball changes to an open state in which the game ball tends to flow into the normal variation winning device 37 (a winning easy state advantageous to the player).

  The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of an easy-to-win state by shortening the variation time of the normal variation display game or setting the probability of hitting the general variation display game to be higher than usual. By making the generation time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the above, a short time state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific gaming state. Even in the probability variation state (excluding the latent probability variation state), the time-short state (the ordinary power support state) occurs repeatedly.

  In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the normal variable prize winning device 37, an attacker type that opens the big prize opening by rotating the upper end side to the front side by the big prize opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). A special variable winning device 39 having an open / close door 39c is provided. The special variable winning device 39 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocking state unfavorable for the player) from the closed state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure changing display game, A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the flow of the game ball into the mouth. Note that a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

  As described above, the game area 32 is provided with the general winning opening 35 and the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening) as a plurality of winning areas where game balls can be won without any particular conditions. Further, as a variable winning device that can operate when a predetermined condition (predetermined result of a special map variable display game or a normal map variable display game) is established and a game ball can be won, a normal variable winning device 37 (second A start winning opening) and a special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) are provided.

  When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning apparatus 37, and the special variable winning apparatus 39 (large winning opening), the payout control apparatus 200 (see FIG. 3) receives the winning winning opening. The number of award balls corresponding to the type of is discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21. In the present embodiment, the prizes of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning port), the starting winning port 36 (first starting winning port), the general winning port 35, and the special variable winning device 39 (large winning port) are awarded. The number of balls is 2, 3, 10, and 14, respectively, and increases in this order.

  In addition, the game area 32 below the normal variation winning device 37 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like. An out ball detection switch 65 (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that enters the out port 30b and is discharged to the outside of the game area 32.

  In addition, a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a common figure fluctuation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a variable display game configured by a 7-segment type indicator (LED lamp) or the like. Display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), fluctuation display part 53 (general figure display, lamps D10 and D18) for the usual figure fluctuation display game, and the start (hold) memory number of each fluctuation display game And a storage display unit for notification (a special figure 1 hold display 54, a special figure 2 hold display 55, a general figure hold display 56). The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 includes lamps D13 and D14. The general-purpose hold indicator 56 includes lamps D15 and D16.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first gaming state display unit 57 (first gaming state indicator, lamp) for notifying whether the player is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normally-timed). D8), the second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D9) that lights up when the time-short state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-short state, and the probability state of jackpot when the gaming machine 10 is turned on has a high probability 3rd game state display part 59 (3rd game state indicator, probability state display part, lamp D17) which displays that it is in the state, the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of special fluctuation winning device 39) is displayed A round display section 60 (lamps D3-D7) is provided.

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by variable display in which identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). Note that the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be configured by an assembly of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing variable display. In addition, all LEDs provided as an indicator are all turned on and off (simultaneously blinking of all LEDs), cycled on (turns on and off from any one LED in a predetermined order every predetermined time), or a plurality of It may be performed by turning on / off (flashing) or circulating lighting with a predetermined number of LEDs. Also on the normal display 53, the variation display game is executed by variation display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the general-purpose display 53 can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special-figure 1 display 51 and the special-figure 2 display 52.

  Further, the collective display device 50 includes a discharge ball number display unit 66 for displaying the number of balls discharged from the gaming machine 10, a payout rate display unit 67 for displaying the payout rate of the gaming machine 10, and a percentage of the game machine 10 Is displayed. Each of the discharge ball number display unit 66, the output rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 is configured by a plurality of (or even one) 7-segment type indicators (LED lamps). The display unit constitutes display means for displaying the number of balls to be discharged, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio.

  In addition, the discharge ball number display unit 66, the output ball rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are not limited to those that directly display the discharge ball number, the output ball rate, and the accessory ratio, respectively. The number of balls, the payout rate, and the ratio of the accessory may be indirectly displayed (for example, a countdown display of the number of discharged balls described later). That is, it is only necessary that the number of discharged balls display unit 66, the output rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 can display information on the number of discharged balls, the output rate, and the rate of an accessory. In addition, the discharge ball number display unit 66, the output ball rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 do not display the number of output balls, the output rate, and the accessory ratio numerically on a 7-segment display. It may be displayed with a level meter or the like.

  Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32, and is the total of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening and the number of game balls that have passed through the out port 30b. The number of discharged balls is basically the same as the number of shot balls, which is the number of game balls shot from the ball launcher to the game area 32. In the present embodiment, the prize winning opening includes a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and A special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) is included. As will be described later, a counting means for counting the number of discharged balls (number of shot balls) is provided. Then, the discharged ball number display section 66 (discharged ball number display means) displays the number of discharged balls, so that the player can grasp the number of game balls launched into the game area 32, and convenience is improved.

  The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shot balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls / number of discharged balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls per 100 discharged balls (the total number of prize balls). The payout rate according to this definition can be obtained even if the number of prize balls is counted at the time of winning a prize and the actual prize balls are not paid out due to the ball running out. In addition, every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 as in the present embodiment, the yield rate may be easily obtained from the number of acquired balls until the number of discharged balls reaches 0 to 100, You may calculate correctly from said definition using the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) and the number of discharge balls accumulated from the power-on of the gaming machine to the present. In the past, displaying the payout rate was not performed. However, in this embodiment, the payout rate display unit 67 (the payout rate display means) displays the payout rate, thereby allowing the player to display the payout rate. Interest and interest in the general winning opening 35 can be given. And the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the ratio of the bonuses is a big hit state (that is, during fanfare and ending) among the total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) obtained by winning the winning award from power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. Is the ratio (%) (so-called consecutive character ratio) of the number of winning balls (number of balls acquired by each role) obtained by winning the winning prize. In addition, the ratio of the prizes is the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit and under the big prize) obtained by winning the big prize opening out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) Unit ratio), or the ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning a prize winning device 37 and a normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning port) ((Role ratio)). Since the number of prize balls is counted at the time of winning a prize, the prize ratio can be calculated even if the actual prize balls are not paid out due to the ball running out. In the present embodiment, the prize ratio display unit 68 (the bonus ratio display means) displays the bonus ratio, so that the interest of the game is improved and the player can easily win the variable winning device (open state). Therefore, it becomes a motivation for the player to continue playing the game. Further, the accessory ratio display is an index for determining whether or not the player should continue to play the game. Furthermore, since the winning at the general winning opening 35 affects the winning ratio, the player can be interested in the general winning opening 35 through the winning ratio display.

  With reference to FIG. 2B, the display mode of the discharge ball number display unit 66 will be described. The discharge ball number display section 66 is composed of two 7-segment type indicators (8-segment type including a point portion) (LED lamp). As shown in FIG. 2B (I), the number of discharged balls is counted down in the discharged ball number display section 66, and (100−the number of discharged balls) is displayed. Further, the number of discharged balls is only counted up to 100 (predetermined number). As will be described later, every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the output rate displayed on the output rate display unit 67 is the number of balls until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100. It is updated to the latest appearance rate during. As a result, if the acquired number of balls (the total number of winning balls) is displayed as it is on the output rate display unit 67, the output rate is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the number of discharged balls is counted down from “99” to “00” in the discharged ball number display section 66, but may be configured to count up from “00” to “99”. When the number of discharged balls reaches 100, “00” is displayed in the discharged ball number display section 66. In the present embodiment, at the timing when “00” is displayed on the number-of-balls display section 66, the display of the payout rate display of the payout rate display section 67 is updated to the latest one. The discharged ball number display section 66 starts the countdown display from the display of “00” after the power is turned on (including power failure recovery). Also, the number of discharged balls is cleared to 0 at the timing of the big hit, and the discharged ball number display section 66 starts a countdown display from the display of “00” after the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 2B (II), in the state other than the game ball being launched or in the customer waiting demonstration state, the discharge ball number display unit 66 is in a non-display state with the display segment (light emitting unit) turned off. Good. The state other than the game ball being fired and the customer waiting demo state are collectively referred to as a “customer waiting state”. The state other than the game ball being launched is a state in which the touch switch signal from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is turned off. Further, when the game control device 100 (FIG. 3) transmits a customer waiting demo command to the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4), the gaming machine 10 enters a customer waiting demo state (a state during a customer waiting demo). On the other hand, in a state where the waiting-for-customer demonstration is not in progress or a game ball is being launched, a segment (light-emitting unit) of the indicator lights up in the discharged ball number display unit 66 so that the player in the game can recognize, and a countdown display is displayed. Run. Since this is a privilege for the player who is playing the game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 2B (III), the discharged ball number display unit 66 performs error display (“EE” display) in order to notify the player during the occurrence of an error or fraud that affects the game. Here, errors and frauds that affect the game are errors and frauds related to glass frame opening and front frame opening (glass frame opening error and front frame opening error described later), and errors related to ball breakage and overflow (fullness). (Shoot ball break error and overflow error described later) are not included. Since the game ball can be manually inserted into the winning opening while the frame is open, the display of the discharge ball number display section 66 is not updated, but the number of discharge balls is counted by the game control device 100 inside the game machine. .

  With reference to FIG. 2C, the display mode of the payout rate display unit 67 will be described. The payout rate display section 67 is composed of two 7-segment type indicators (8-segment type including a point portion) (LED lamp). As shown in FIG. 2C (I), in the payout rate display section 67, the payout rate is displayed only from 0 to 99. indicate.

  In addition, as described above, the payout rate display of the payout rate display unit 67 is performed until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100 every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number). It is updated to the latest appearance rate. Each time the appearance rate display unit 67 updates the appearance rate display, it changes the emission color of the segment (light emitting unit) to clearly indicate that the output rate display has been updated. In this case, the player can easily recognize the update of the payout rate. For example, the payout rate display unit 67 changes from red to green or from green to red every time the payout rate display is updated. It should be noted that the output rate display unit 67 may always display the output rate in a single color without changing the color.

  Further, the output rate display unit 67 may change the color of the output rate display according to the output rate based on the design value (for example, the base value 40 in the normal gaming state). Thereby, the information warning of the deviation from the design value of the payout rate can be performed. For example, the payout rate is displayed in green in the range of 30-50, displayed in yellow in the range of 10-29 and 51-60, and displayed in red in the range of 0-9 and 61 or more. In addition, during the big hit, the payout rate becomes very large, so it may be displayed in another color (white or rainbow) instead of red.

  Further, the payout rate display section 67 displays “00” after power-on (including power failure recovery). Further, the payout rate is cleared to 0 at the timing when the big hit ends, and the payout rate display section 67 displays “00”.

  As shown in FIG. 2C (II), in the state other than the game ball being fired or in the customer waiting demonstration state (that is, the customer waiting state), the payout rate display unit 67 is in a state in which the display segment is turned off and is not displayed. It may be. On the other hand, in a state where the waiting-for-customer demonstration is not in progress or a game ball is being launched, the segment of the indicator is turned on in the game output rate display section 67, and the game output rate is displayed so that the player in the game can recognize. Since this is a privilege for the player who is playing the game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased. Furthermore, since the payout rate cannot be obtained until the number of discharged balls reaches 100 after the game machine 10 is turned on, the payout rate display unit 67 may be in a non-display state.

  Conversely, in a state other than a game ball being fired or in a customer waiting demo state, the payout rate display unit 67 displays the ball payout rate, and the game ball is not in a customer waiting demo or in a state where a game ball is being fired. It is good also as a structure which hides a cypress rate. Thereby, the player can select a gaming machine or a game machine to play in consideration of the payout rate.

  As shown in FIG. 2C (III), the payout rate display unit 67 performs error display (“EE” display) to notify the player during the occurrence of an error or fraud that affects the game. Here, errors and frauds that affect the game are errors and frauds related to glass frame opening and front frame opening (glass frame opening error and front frame opening error described later), and errors related to ball breakage and overflow (fullness). (Shoot ball break error and overflow error described later) are not included. In addition, since it is possible to put the game ball into the winning opening by hand while the frame is open, the display of the payout rate display section 67 is not updated, but the game control device 100 inside the game machine calculates (updates) the payout rate. doing.

  With reference to FIG. 2D, the display mode of the accessory ratio display unit 68 will be described. The accessory ratio display unit 68 includes three 7-segment type indicators (8-segment type including a point portion) (LED lamps). As shown in FIG. 2D (I), the accessory ratio display unit 68 displays the value of the accessory ratio (%) from “00.0” to “99.9” from the first decimal place. When the ratio of the accessory is 100%, “100” is displayed.

  Further, the accessory ratio display unit 68 displays the accessory ratio according to the accessory ratio with reference to a reference value determined by the rules (for example, a continuous accessory ratio of 60% which is a prize ball by continuous operation of the accessory). You may change the color. Thereby, it is possible to notify and notify the deviation from the reference value of the accessory ratio. For example, in the case where the ratio of the actors corresponds to the ratio of consecutive actors, the actors ratio is displayed in green in the range of 00.0% to 55.0% and yellow in the range of 55.1% to 60.0%. And in red in the range of 60.1% to 100%. In addition, during the big hit, since the ratio of the accessory increases, it may be displayed in another color (white or rainbow). In addition, for example, the bonus rate is obtained by winning a so-called bonus rate that is commonly used (out of the total number of winning balls, winning all bonuses (special variable prize winning device 39 and normal variable prize winning device 37). The ratio of the number of prize balls is 70%, and the role ratio is displayed in green in the range of 00.0% to 65.0%, and 65.1% to 70.0%. Is displayed in yellow, and in the range of 70.1% to 100%, it is displayed in red.

  The number of winning balls for each role (the number of winning balls for each role) for calculating the winning rate of the winning rate ratio display unit 68 is accumulated until the gaming machine 10 is turned off and cleared when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on (including power failure recovery), the accessory ratio display is “00.0”. Thereafter, in the accessory ratio display unit 68, the accessory ratio is updated whenever a winning occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 2D (II), in the state other than the game ball being fired or in the customer waiting demo state (that is, in the customer waiting state), the accessory ratio display unit 68 is turned off when the segment (light emitting unit) of the display is turned off. It may be in a display state. On the other hand, in the state where the customer waiting demonstration is not being performed or the game ball is being launched, the segment (light emitting unit) of the indicator lights up in the accessory ratio display unit 68, and the accessory ratio is set so that the player in the game can recognize it. indicate. Since this is a privilege for the player who is playing the game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the state other than the game ball being launched or in the customer waiting demo state, the accessory ratio display unit 68 displays the accessory ratio, and in the state not in the customer waiting demonstration or the state in which the game ball is being launched. It is good also as a structure which hides an object ratio. Thereby, the player can select a gaming machine or a game table to be played in consideration of the bonus ratio.

  As shown in FIG. 2D (III), the accessory ratio display unit 68 performs error display (“EEE” display) to notify the player during the occurrence of an error or fraud that affects the game. Here, errors and frauds that affect the game are errors and frauds related to glass frame opening and front frame opening (glass frame opening error and front frame opening error described later), and errors related to ball breakage and overflow (fullness). (Shoot ball break error and overflow error described later) are not included. In addition, since it is possible to put the game ball into the prize opening by hand while the frame is open, the display of the accessory ratio display unit 68 is not updated, but the accessory ratio is calculated (updated) by the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine. doing.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the details of the general map variation display game and the special map variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, wins the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 39, or flows into the outlet 30 b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is passed through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

  The normal start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed the normal start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

  A state in which the normal map variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been executed and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or the result of the normal map variable display game is normal When the variable winning device 37 has been converted to the open state, when the game ball passes the normal start gate 34, if the normal start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the stored number is added (+1).

  In the normal map start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit error of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored, and when this hit determination random number value coincides with the determination value, the normal map change display is performed. A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the game.

  The universal map display game is executed by a universal map display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general-purpose) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information varies by blinking this LED. Display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

  When the common figure random number value extracted when passing through the common figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure display unit 53 stops in a hit state and enters a hit state. At this time, when the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) is driven, the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is converted. Winning is allowed.

  The winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the winning to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 are detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the start opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). A game ball won at the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game and is stored as a predetermined upper limit number, and a game ball won at the normal variable prize winning device 37 is shown in FIG. It is detected as the start winning ball of the variable display game, and stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

  When detecting the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, each fluctuation pattern random number value and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 as a special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The number stored in the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning at the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 or the second start memory.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game) and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) are identified in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 (see FIG. This is performed by suspending and displaying a predetermined result form after variably displaying special symbols and special symbols). In addition, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure fluctuation display game for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) corresponding to each special figure fluctuation display game.

  In the decoration special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling display is started, symbols changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure changing display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest.

  When a game ball is won at the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are arranged).

  At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning port solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). That is, the big prize opening provided in the special variable prize winning device 39 opens widely for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls wins, during which the player is given a privilege that he can acquire many game balls. The

  When the game ball is won at the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variable display game As a result of this, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a small hit state is obtained. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is the small hit result mode. In this embodiment, a big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

  At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short period of time by energizing the large winning solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3).

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  The big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. That the condition device does not operate means that the specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

  Specifically, in the case of a big win, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display game is not executed simultaneously. Is set as follows.

  As for the decorative special figure fluctuation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in different display devices or in different display areas, or the same display. You may make it perform in an apparatus or a display area. In this case, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prevented from being executed simultaneously. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure change display game is ready to be executed, the special figure 2 change display game is executed.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, the count switch. (39a) includes a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. It is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch having a typical contact can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board). The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). A data bus 140 that connects between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130; a CPU 110 having the input unit 111; an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; Etc.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference for a random number generation circuit. And an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and the like. , A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area for the CPU 111a and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the reach state (except for the special result mode) to the reach state and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach productions, and there is a possibility that a special result mode may be derived (different expected values). Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in a variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is likely to be a big hit compared to the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the game machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a jackpot for determining the jackpot symbol. A random number generation circuit for generating a random number, a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern in a special figure fluctuation display game (including execution time of a fluctuation display game in a fluctuation display without various reach and reach) And a clock generator that generates a clock for giving a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

  Further, the CPU 111a obtains any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, and the starting memory number. Based on the above, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, when executing the special figure fluctuation display game, the CPU 111a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit 91 to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the loan request signal from the card unit 600 to pay out the loaned money.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the general start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. The switch 36a is connected to a start port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning port 37, winning port switches 35a to 35n, and a large winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal having a low level of 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals from the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, and the big winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. Is done.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

  Further, the second input port 123 has an out-ball detection switch 65 for detecting a detection signal of a fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 and a game ball entering the out-port 30b. Detection signal, a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, and a payout busy signal. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame). Is the payout busy signal in a state in which the payout control device 200 can accept a command? It is a signal indicating whether or not.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 includes a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12, and a status indicating a payout abnormality. A game is acquired via the data bus 140 by taking in a signal, a shot ball switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before paying out, an overflow switch signal indicating overflow, and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24. A first input port 122 for supplying to the microcomputer 111 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows.

  Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. Yes. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes opening / closing data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variation winning device 37, and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 39b that opens the special variation winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

  The output unit 130 also includes third output ports 135-1 and 135-for outputting on / off data of segment lines to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50. 2. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 is connected.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the power solenoid 37c and the big prize solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. , Second drivers 138b-1, 138b-2 for outputting segment line on / off drive signals output from the third output ports 135-1, 135-2 on the current supply side of the collective display device 50, fourth output. A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the port 136, and an external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal 71 is provided. The second driver 138 b-2 outputs segment line on / off drive signals for the discharge ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 in the collective display device 50. The second driver 138b-1 outputs a segment line on / off drive signal for the other display unit (display) of the collective display device 50.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

  The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 serving as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

  The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure A possible FeRAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the presentation, instructs the VDP 312 about the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, turns on the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) includes a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a change command, a stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 via the command I / F 331. As received. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41).

  These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25 b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function for detecting the on / off state of the production effect switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like, and a detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, or a volume adjustment switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of 335 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do.

  Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, and the like in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. The effect control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the effect control device 300 is powered on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111b. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a hit / decision of the normal variation display game is determined.

  Then, the universal symbol display game is displayed on the universal symbol display device, after the identification symbol is varied and displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped. When the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the start memory. The random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

  Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the start memory, the random value for determining the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is missed.

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays a special result state on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a performs control for allowing the game ball to flow into the special winning opening by, for example, opening the open / close door 39c of the special variable winning apparatus 39 by the special winning opening solenoid 39b. .

  Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. One round (R) is to open the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved, and a control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 or 4 times). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability variation state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the short-time state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short-time operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. Since the opening time of the vehicle is controlled so as to be substantially increased, the power transmission is supported. Even in a high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, the ordinary power support is executed in a time-short state overlappingly.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to perform time-reduced variation in which the execution time of the above-described usual map variation display game (ordinary diagram variation time) is set to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10,000 msec is 1000 msec). In the short time state, the execution time of the special figure change display game (special figure change time) is also shortened from the normal time, and the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure change display game is also executed.

  Further, in the short-time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). It is.

  Also, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first release time (for example, 100 msec) in which the release time (normal power release time) is the normal state. It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1352 msec).

  Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. It is possible to set the number of second releases (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the short time state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. In addition, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control apparatus 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control apparatus 100, the step code (number) is represented as “A ***”.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control apparatus 100 first executes a process for prohibiting interruption (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

  Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from game control apparatus 100 serving as main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting until the computer starts normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  The power supply delay timer is measured using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not a target for RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control apparatus 100 performs the time measurement of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (for example, two times). A1008), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. Determine (A1010). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

  In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is “N”), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (A1011), It is determined whether or not the timer value is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

  In addition, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time has ended, the game control apparatus 100 reads out and writes RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1013), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (A1016).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (the result of A1016 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the power outage inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data. (A1017). If it is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (A1018).

  Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum when the power is turned off (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A1021 in FIG. 5B, and the process in the case of normal recovery from a power failure is executed.

  In addition, when the initialization switch is on (result of A1016 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1017 is “N”). Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is “N”) and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1026 in FIG. 5B and the initialization process is executed. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  The game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value when the power failure is restored (when the power is turned on) in the area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. Further, the areas to be initialized include a discharge ball number area, an acquired ball number area, and an earned ball number area for each accessory, which will be described later. As a result, the number of discharged balls, the number of acquired balls, the number of acquired balls for each role, as well as the winning rate obtained from the number of acquired balls, and the rate of bonuses calculated from the number of balls acquired for each role are cleared to 0. become. In addition, the structure which does not clear 0 is also possible for the number-of-acquisition ball number area (and consequently the ratio of the bonus). In addition, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. After that, the game control apparatus 100 examines an area for storing the game state in the RWM and determines whether or not the game state is a high probability state (A1022).

  Here, when the gaming state is not a high probability state (the result of A1022 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 skips the processing of Step A1023 and Step A1024 and proceeds to the processing of Step A1025. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a high probability state (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1023), for example, a high probability notification LED provided in the batch display device 50 (Error indicator) ON (lighted) data is saved in the segment area (A1024). And the command at the time of a power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to rationally perform the below-mentioned special figure game process is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (A1025), and step A1031 Execute the process.

  On the other hand, when the processing of step A1026 is executed after execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to access permission (A1026). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1027), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (A1028).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1029). The area to be initialized is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (A1030), and executes the process of step A1031.

  Note that the power failure recovery command transmitted in step A1025 and the RAM initialization command transmitted in step A1030 include the model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and the suspension of special figures 1 and 2. A decoration special figure 1 holding number command indicating a number and a decoration special figure 2 holding number command, and a probability information command indicating a probability state are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. When initialized at power-on, a power-on command is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included. The RAM initialization command includes a RAM initialization command.

  The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1031). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After executing the CTC activation process of step A1031, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1032). Specifically, the CPU 111a performs setting of a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

  Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines

  In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random numbers according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) Random number 1, Big hit symbol random number 2), Random number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), Random number to determine base symbol hit (per random number), Random number to determine base symbol hit symbol (per symbol random number) Etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1033) and an interrupt is permitted (A1034). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1035). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operation clock. Is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing).

  In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number goes around. Each random number may be updated by a counter by +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear without overlapping until one round is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step A1035, the game control device 100 sets the number of times of checking by reading the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1036), and monitoring the power failure. It is determined whether or not the signal is on (A1037). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number update process of step A1035. That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1035) (A1034), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to prevent the interruption process from being pressed by waiting in the value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process of step A1035 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number update processes are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036. Determine (A1038). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1038 is “N”), the process returns to step A1037 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

  In addition, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (the result of A1038 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1039) and off-data is output to all output ports (A1040).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1041), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1042). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off is executed (A1043), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1044). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1045), and the system waits until the gaming machine is powered off.

  In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) operable from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111c, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum calculation process. The checksum calculation process is executed in steps A1019 and A1043 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets the start address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and “0” is set as a calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1106). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (A1107).

  If the checksum calculation has not ended (the result of A1107 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 repeats the processing from step A1104 to step A1107. When the checksum calculation is completed (the result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation process is terminated.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of initial value random number update processing. The initial value random number update process is executed in step A1035 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates the big hit symbol initial value random number by +1 (increases by 1) (A1201), and updates the small hit symbol initial value random number by +1 (A1202). Subsequently, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1203), the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1204), and the initial value random number updating process is terminated.

  Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” determines the small hit symbol stop figure of the special figure It is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number to be performed. Also, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the usual figure variation game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the normal figure It is a random number that is the initial value.

  As described above, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM head address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes input processing for inputting from various sensors and switches, capturing signals, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). If a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permitted state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes payout command transmission processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processing to the payout control device 200 (A1305), and further, random number update processing 1 (A1306), random number update Process 2 (A1307) is executed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, and the big winning port switch 39a, and an error is monitored (front surface). A winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed (A1308).

  Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A1309), and then a general figure game process for carrying out a process relating to the normal figure fluctuation display game is executed (A1310).

  Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the gaming machine 10 and executes a segment LED editing process for driving a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display desired contents. (A1311).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1312). Furthermore, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (panel radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking whether there is any abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board is executed (A1313).

  After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1314). Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that, when the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state and the register bank specification are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, the interrupt is permitted after the external information editing process. Or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of input processing.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 (A1401). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (A1402).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves (stores) the read state of the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A1404), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1405). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, a switch reading process is executed (A1408). Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares an address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A1409), and prepares an address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (A1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, thereafter, a switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process is terminated.

[Switch read processing]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch reading process.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1501). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (A1502), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1503), and saved (stored) in the port input state of the target switch control area. (A1504). Thereafter, the process waits until a delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the game control device 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal captured in the target input port (A1506). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (A1507), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1508), and the port input state of the target switch control area (first time data) ) And save the inverted data (second time data) (A1509). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same state bit is 1 and the different bit is 0 in the first and second reads (A1510), and the determinate bit pattern and port input state 2 are ANDed to confirm this time Bits are set (A1511).

  Next, the game control device 100 creates an undetermined bit pattern in which the same status bit is 0 and the different bit is 1 in the first and second readings (A1512), and the undetermined bit pattern and the previous interrupt The logical product with the definite state is calculated and used as the previous hold bit (A1513). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed.

  Then, the game control device 100 combines the current confirmed bit and the previous held bit and saves it as the current confirmed state (A1514). Further, an exclusive OR of the previous state and the final state is taken and saved as a rising edge (A1515). Thereafter, the switch reading process ends.

  If the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt process, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method of determining whether or not it has been done, but in such a case, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that it cannot be determined correctly. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (A1304) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

  The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) off-data to the ports 135-1 and 135-2 (see FIG. 3) that output the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50, for example, in the range of 0 to 4 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). The acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output / external information output port 136 (A1606). After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135-1 (A1608).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the touch switch signal from the touch switch (launching touch switch) provided on the operation handle 24 is an ON signal (A1609). That is, it is determined whether or not the operation handle 24 is operated. When the touch switch signal from the touch switch is an ON signal (the result of A1609 is “Y”), the segment output data is loaded from the segment area corresponding to the digit counter (A1610), and the segment output data is sent to the segment output port 2 ( Output to the port 135-2) (A1612). The segment output data to be output here is the segment output data for the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68. As a result, when the operation handle 24 is operated, the number of discharged balls displayed on the discharged ball number display unit 66, the output of the output rate on the output rate display unit 67, and the amount ratio display unit 68 are displayed. It is possible to display the ratio of items.

  On the other hand, when the touch switch signal from the touch switch is an off signal (the result of A1609 is “N”), the game control device 100 turns off the 7-segment display (LED lamp) (LED off). The segment output data is set (A1611), and the segment output data is output to the segment output port 2 (port 135-2) (A1612). Thereby, when the operation handle 24 is not operated, the number of discharged balls displayed on the discharged ball number display unit 66, the display of the output rate on the output rate display unit 67, and the amount ratio display unit 68 The character ratio display is hidden.

  In step A1609, instead of determining whether or not the touch switch of the operation handle 24 is on, it may be determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is in progress (customer waiting demo state). Then, when the demonstration is being performed while waiting for the customer, the display is executed on the number-of-balls display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 (A1610, A1612). If not, the discharged ball number display part 66, the payout rate display part 67, and the accessory ratio display part 68 may be hidden (A1611, A1612). As will be described later, when the customer waiting demo flag indicating that the customer waiting demo state (the customer waiting demo state) is set (A3210 in FIG. 27), that is, the game control device 100 produces an effect. When a customer waiting demo command is transmitted to the control device 300, it can be determined that a customer waiting demo is in progress.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1613), further synthesizes the synthesized data and the output data for permission to fire (A1614), and finally synthesizes them. Data is output to the external information / firing permission signal output port 137 (A1615). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). Thereafter, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test fire test apparatus, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The synthesized data is output (A1618). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output ports 6 and 7 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and synthesized to the test terminal output ports 6 and 7 on the relay board 70. The output data is output (A1621). The data of step A1621 is data on the payout rate. Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output ports 8 and 9 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and synthesized to the test terminal output ports 8 and 9 on the relay board 70. Data is output (A1622) and the output process is terminated. The data of step A1622 is data on the ratio of items.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure of payout command transmission processing.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter for each number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, two winning balls, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). An area is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination, and more unsent This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control apparatus 100 receives a winning that is a check target among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the number counter area.

  When there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (the result of A1701 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked (A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers in all the winning number counter areas has been completed (A1703).

  When all the checks are completed (the result of A1703 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the process of step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1703 is “N”), the process returns to step A1701, and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a count number (the result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1704), and the winning number counter area 2 The payout number corresponding to the address is acquired (A1705). Then, the value in the prize ball remaining area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area as a new prize ball remaining number (A1707). Note that as the value of the remaining prize ball area before the processing of step A1707, a fraction that has not reached a predetermined number as a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether or not the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). If it is not equal to or greater than 0 (the result of A1709 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is “Y”), the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by 1 (A1710), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (A1711). Further, the process returns to step A1708.

  Through the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

  If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 (A1712), and determines whether or not the payout command transmission timer has reached 0 (A1713). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (the result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (the result of A1713 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal status (flag) is busy (busy state flag) (A1714).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately start payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is in an on state (busy state). It is said. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle that can immediately start payout control. Any one of a state, a busy state where the payout control cannot be started immediately, and an undefined state where the state is undefined is set.

  When the payout busy signal status is busy (the result of A1714 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the payout command transmission process. When not busy, the idle state and the undefined state are included. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  When the payout busy signal status is not busy (the result of A1714 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 checks whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether the winning number counter area 1 has a count, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, a count number other than “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is.

  When there is no count number (the result of A1715 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (A1716), and all the winning number counter areas are updated. It is determined whether or not the count number has been checked (A1717). If all checks are completed (the result of A1717 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1717 is “N”), the process returns to step A1715, and the processes from step A1715 to A1717 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a count number (the result of A1715 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1718), and the target winning number counter A payout command corresponding to the area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control apparatus 100 can start the payout control with a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) can start payout control. In this case, a prize ball command transmission means for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means is provided.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have a function to do so, it is possible to realize accurate payout control.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present embodiment, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and the winning areas provided in the gaming area 32 (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the general winning port 35, and the special variable winning device 39). A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of the game balls, and a payout control means for performing payout control of game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means ( And a game control means for receiving a prize ball command based on a status signal (busy signal) output from the payout control means and indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. When a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device, the award is immediately received. Ball command Sending a prize ball command to the payout control means in response to a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means without being sent to the payout control means. Will be doing.

  The game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning apparatus 39) having different numbers of winning balls, and game control means (game control apparatus). 100) is provided with a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can specify whether or not a prize ball command has been transmitted for each prize ball number to instruct game ball payout control, and the status signal starts payout control. If there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the status signal indicates the payout Whether or not the control means can start payout control is determined before specifying whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter.

  In addition to performing game control in an integrated manner, based on the winning of a game ball in a predetermined winning area (first starting winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, general winning port 35, special variable winning device 39). Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command and payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The game control means provides a prize ball command when the status signal indicating whether the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball to the payout control means, and a prize ball signal (main prize) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is awarded to a predetermined prize area Ball signal) gaming machine External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting to the outside, and the external information output means determines whether or not the state signal output from the payout control means can start payout control by the payout control means. The prize ball signal is output regardless of whether or not.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second start winning port 37, general winning port 35). , A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the special variable prize winning device 39), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, one prize ball command is issued as the payout control means (payout) The winning ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and the predetermined winning area is configured to transmit to the control device 200). Entering game balls into The number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating in response to the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The prize ball signal counter is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is awarded to the area, and to output a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. Can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and updates the game ball when winning in the predetermined winning area, and accumulates the number of winning balls by the external information output means By performing the update in correspondence with the processing, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the random number update process 1. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1801).

  When the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A1804. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is “Y”), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). If the small hit design random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “N”), the processing after step A1807 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads the small hit symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (A1805). Then, the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set in a register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1806).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1807). If the winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is “N”), the processing after step A1810 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the winning random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads the winning initial value random number as the next initial value (A1808). Then, the next initial value of the loaded hit random number is set in a register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1809).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1810). If the winning design random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1810 is “N”), the random number update processing 1 is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the winning design random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1810 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the winning design initial value random number as the next initial value (A1811). Then, the next initial value of the loaded winning symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1812), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2, 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 updates both. Target and update every time an interrupt occurs. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (reach fluctuation mode determining random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which random number to be updated from among a plurality of random numbers to be updated (A1901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (A1903). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter to which a random value is set (A1904).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter, and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “Y”), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value ( Hereinafter, this is referred to as “masked value”) and set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (A1907), and the process proceeds to step A1909.

  In addition, when the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the upper 1 byte as “0” as the addition value and sets the lower 1 byte. The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is to prevent the masked value from being “0” and to prevent the value from changing by adding “0”.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1909). If it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “Y”), the value of the random number area to be updated (2 bytes) is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “N”), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value. A value (1 byte) is set (A1911), and the process proceeds to step A1912.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in the process of step A1907 or A1908 to the random number value as a new random value, and whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in the process of A1903. It is determined whether or not (A1913).

  If the new random number value is not greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 places the new random value in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number. Save (A1915). When the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is “Y”), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new new random value (A1914). A random number value is saved in a random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A1915).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (A1916). If it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “N”), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “Y”), a new random value (or a value if a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number. (A1917), and the random number update process 2 ends.

  In this way, the CPU 111a updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Accordingly, the CPU 111a, among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, changes the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 15A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a winning mouth switch / status monitoring process. The prize opening switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1308 in the timer interrupt process. The winning port switch / status monitoring process constitutes monitoring means for monitoring a winning at each winning port and executing a predetermined process when a winning is received. As a predetermined process, the number of discharged balls is updated by +1 (added by 1), or an addition process is performed on the number of winning balls by winning the prize to calculate a payout rate (total number of winning balls) and an accessory ratio There are things.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) (A2001). Then, an illegal & winning monitoring process is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open (A2002). Details of the fraud & prize winning monitoring process will be described later.

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) (A2003). Then, the illegal winning / winning monitoring process for monitoring the illegal winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2004). Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal power support state, that is, whether or not it is in the short-time state or the probability variation state (excluding the latent probability variation state) (A2005).

  When the game control device 100 is in the normal power support state (the result of A2005 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2006). ). Then, an illegal & prize winning monitoring process for monitoring an illegal prize and detecting a normal prize is executed (A2007). Next, a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring is prepared (A2008). In this embodiment, the winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the winning opening switches (SW) 35a and 35b of the left and right general winning openings 35 and the start opening 1 switch 36a. Next, a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2009).

  On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not in the normal power support state (the result of A2005 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for winning switch that does not require fraud monitoring (A2010). In this embodiment, the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is the winning opening switch (SW) 35a, 35b of the left and right general winning openings 35 and the starting opening 1 switch of the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening). 36a. Next, a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2011). A winning port monitoring table corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 is prepared (A2012). Then, an illegal & prize winning monitoring process for monitoring an illegal prize and detecting a normal prize is executed (A2013).

  FIG. 15B is a table showing the priority order regarding winning-port monitoring for each gaming state. This priority order is realized by the order of winning-port monitoring in the winning-port switch / status monitoring processing (FIG. 15A) and the winning-number counter updating processing (FIG. 17A) described later.

  Here, winning-port monitoring refers to counting the number of winnings, updating the number of discharged balls (calculation), and the winning rate in fraud & winning monitoring or winning counter updating (also executed in fraud & winning monitoring). It is to perform the calculation of, and the calculation of the ratio of objects. In particular, even when there is a winning at the same time, a winning rate and an accessory ratio are calculated based on a predetermined priority order as shown in FIG. Done. Note that in the normal gaming state and the ordinary power support state, the prize winning opening is not opened unless there is fraud, so it is not added to the priority table.

  As shown in FIG. 15B (I), the priority order for winning-port monitoring can be changed according to the gaming state (steps A2005 to A2013). That is, in accordance with the determination as to whether or not it is in the ordinary power support state (A2005), the winning counter updating process (also executed in the fraud & winning monitoring process) is performed with the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning port). It is possible to set (determine) which of the prize winning ports (general winning a prize port 35 and start winning prize port 36 (first starting prize winning port)) that does not require fraud monitoring first.

  In particular, when the normal power support state is in effect (the result of A2005 is “Y”), the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 36a) that does not require fraud monitoring to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 (second starting winning opening). ) Can be executed prior to the start winning opening 36 (the first starting winning opening) having (), such as counting the number of winning prizes, updating the number of discharged balls, and adding the number of acquired balls. As will be described later, among the winning ports having a winning port switch that does not require fraud monitoring, the winning port monitoring of the general winning port 35 is prioritized before the starting winning port 36 (first starting winning port). Shall be executed. In addition, when it is not in the ordinary power support state (the result of A2005 is “N”), that is, in the normal game state, the special game state, etc., the start prize having a prize port switch (start port 1 switch 36a) that does not require fraud monitoring. The winning opening can be monitored for the opening 36 (first starting winning opening) before the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37 (second starting winning opening).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 15B (II), when the power transmission support is in progress (the result of A2005 is “Y”), among the start winning ports of the winning port switch that does not require fraud monitoring, If only the winning mouth monitoring (winning number counter updating process) is executed before the winning mouth monitoring (A2006, A2007) of the normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning mouth), the normal variation winning device 37 (second starting) is executed. It is possible to preferentially monitor the winning opening for the general winning opening 35 having a larger number of prize balls than the winning opening monitoring of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening).

  Also, in game states other than the general power support state (special game state, normal game state, etc.), winning hole monitoring is preferentially performed in the order of winning holes having the largest number of winning balls (number of winning balls). As a result, the highest possible payout rate is preferentially obtained, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

  Further, as a modified example, as shown in FIG. 15C, the processing of steps A2005 to A2009 of the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing of FIG. 15A may be deleted and the processing of steps A2010 to A2013 may be executed after step A2004. Good. In this case, in all gaming states (without depending on the gaming state), the winning prize order (the number of prize balls) obtained is the order of winning prizes (large winning entry → general winning entry → first start winning entry → In the order of the second start winning opening), winning opening monitoring can be prioritized and executed. In this case, the highest possible payout rate is preferentially obtained, and the player's sense of expectation for the game can be improved. The winning opening switch / state monitoring process of FIG. 15C monitors winnings at each winning opening in the order of the number of winning balls to be obtained, and if there are winnings, adds the number of winning balls to win the winning rate The monitoring means for calculating the (total number of prize balls) and the ratio of the items is configured.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the out ball detection switch 65 after step A2009 or A2013 (A2014). When there is an input to the out ball detection switch 65 (the result of A2014 is “Y”), the value of the discharge ball number area for storing the discharge ball number is updated by 1 in order to add 1 to the discharge ball number (A2015), A ball performance monitoring process described later is executed (A2016). Then, an out ball detection command indicating that a ball has entered the out port 30b is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (A2017). Thereafter, a state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored such as whether an error has occurred or which signal is to be monitored this time is updated ( A2018).

  In the present embodiment, the out-ball detection switch 65 and each winning hole switch detect the game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 32, so that the number of discharged balls is updated by 1 (A2015, A2210). . However, since the number of balls to be fired from the ball launcher is basically equal to the number of game balls to be discharged to the outside of the game area 32, a switch (sensor) that directly detects the ball launched from the ball launcher. ) May be provided to count the number of discharged balls. In addition, since there is a return to the ball launcher from the ball launcher, the number of discharged balls is more accurate when using the outball detection switch 65 and each prize opening switch as in this embodiment. Can count.

  When there is no input to the out ball detection switch 65 (result of A2014 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the state scan counter (A2018). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting a state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (A2019). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2020). Details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shoot ball break error) based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the dispensing abnormality status signal (dispensing abnormality error) Monitoring is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2021). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2022).

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. When the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave improper signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2023). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2023 is “N”), the winning prize switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next.

  In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2023 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2024), and an error has occurred. A game machine state check process for determining the state of the game machine is executed (A2025).

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (a payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2026). ), The winning prize switch / status monitoring process is terminated. Details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later.

  Note that the processing from step A2024 to A2026 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2024 to A2026 is performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The fraud & prize winning monitoring process is executed in steps A2002, A2004, A2007, and A2013 in the prize opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  The fraud & winning monitoring process is a process that is performed on the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning apparatus 39 and the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning apparatus 37. For the 2nd starting prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning device 37) and large prize winning opening (special variable prize winning device 39), open the opening / closing member forcibly using a piano wire or illegal equipment, etc. and put the game ball into the prize ball Since it is easy for fraud to be paid out, fraud is monitored in addition to winning detection.

  First, the game control device 100 checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch to be monitored for error (A2101), and determines whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (A2102). For example, the fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the large winning port switch 39a.

  Then, when it is the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (the result of A2103 is “N”), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is “Y”), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (A2104), and the illegal winning number after addition is determined to be the fraudulent occurrence of the monitoring target. It is determined whether or not the number is more than 5 (for example, 5) (A2105).

  The reason why the number of judgments is five is that, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent a case where a prize is won or a signal is noisy and not to be judged as illegal, and an error is not easily determined even though it is not illegal.

  If the number is not equal to or greater than the determination number (the result of A2105 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a winning mouth monitoring table for the target winning mouth switch (A2110). If the number is equal to or greater than the determination number (the result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the fraud occurrence determination number (A2106), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area. (A2107).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares the target fraud occurrence command as an effect command (A2108), and further prepares a fraudulent winning occurrence flag as the fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110), and the number of winnings for setting the winning ball Counter update processing is executed (A2111). Details of the winning number counter updating process will be described later.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112), and determines whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (result of A2113 is “N”), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when update of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is “Y”), if the target notification timer is not 0, −1 is updated (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is a winning port switch (start port 2 switch 37a) in the normal variation winning device 37. In addition, the notification timer is allowed to be updated when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is one large winning port switch 39a, and is permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the other large winning port switch 39a. Not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the special variation winning device 39, and to be up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and when the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up. Ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. If the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is “Y”), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancel command is prepared as an effect command (A2116). Then, an illegal winning cancellation flag is prepared as an illegal flag (A2117). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

  The game control device 100 is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “Y”), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize winning monitoring process. Clears the target number of illegal prizes (A2119).

  In addition, the game control device 100 does not execute the processing of step A2119 or when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “N”), that is, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process before the previous time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

  When the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (the result of A2120 is “N”), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (A2121), and the production command is set. The process is executed (A2122). Thereafter, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.

  Through the above process, a fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the production control device 300 when a fraud occurs, and a fraud release command is transmitted to the production control device 300 along with a fraud release, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 17A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of winning number counter update processing. The winning number counter updating process is executed in steps A2009 and A2011 of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A and in step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the number of winning port switches to be monitored from the winning port monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (more accurately, an input change) to the target winning port switch. (A2202). If there is no input (the result of A2202 is “N”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2216), and it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (A2217). It should be noted that the table address is updated so that the target winning port switch changes in the order of the left winning port switch 35a, the right winning port switch 35b, and the start port 1 switch 36a, and the winning port of the general winning port 35 The monitoring is preferentially executed prior to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening).

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the target prize opening switch (the result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2203) and sets the loaded value. +1 is updated (A2204). In the winning number counter area, the count number is updated by +1 (added by 1) for each winning at the target winning opening, and the winning number (number of winnings) at the target winning opening is stored. Further, it is determined whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2205).

  If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). Next, the number of winning balls corresponding to the target winning number counter area 1 (target winning port) is set (A2207). Then, the set number of winning balls is added to the value of the acquired number of balls area (A2208), and the set number of winning balls is added to the value of the number of acquired balls for each object (A2209). The value is updated by +1 (A2210). After that, a ball performance monitoring process (to be described later) is executed for calculating the yield rate and the ratio of the bonuses, and controlling the display of the discharged ball number display unit 66, the yield rate display unit 67, and the bonus rate display unit 68. To do.

  In the present embodiment, the out-ball detection switch 65 and each prize opening switch detect a game ball discharged to the outside of the game area 32, and the game control device 100 updates and counts the number of discharged balls by +1 ( A2015, A2210), a discharge ball number counting means for counting the number of discharged balls is configured. However, since the number of game balls emitted from the ball launcher is basically equal to the number of game balls discharged outside the game area 32, a switch for detecting a shot ball from the ball launcher ( Sensor) and the game control apparatus 100 counts the number of shot balls, so that the discharged ball number counting means for counting the number of shot balls may be configured instead of the discharged ball count means. In addition, since there is a return to the ball launching device from the ball launching device, the number of discharged balls can be counted more accurately when the game ball is used by the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning port switch.

  The game control apparatus 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 2 after completion of the process of step A2211 or when an overflow occurs (result of A2205 is “Y”) (A2212). Thereafter, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2213), and determines whether or not an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2214).

  When no overflow occurs (result of A2214 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 2 (A2215). After the process of step A2215 is completed or when an overflow occurs (result of A2214 is “Y”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2216). Then, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all the switches has been completed (A2217).

  If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (the result of A2217 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 returns to the process of step A2202 for determining whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch. If all the switches have been monitored (the result of A2217 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area, and winning information (winning number, winning number) is stored.

  Next, referring to FIG. 17B, the number of discharged balls area for storing the number of discharged balls, the number of acquired balls area for storing the number of acquired balls (total of the number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls, A description will be given of the earned ball number area for each role for storing the earned ball number for each role. The discharged ball number area, the acquired ball number area, and the earned ball number area for each accessory are provided in the RWM (read / write memory: RAM, EEPROM, etc.) of the game control apparatus 100.

  The number of acquired balls is used to obtain a payout rate. The number of balls acquired by each role is used to calculate the rate of the role. The number of balls acquired for each winning combination is the number of acquired balls for each winning opening (the winning combination) (however, the big winning opening is distinguished between the big hit state and the small hit state). Further, when the total value (total number) of the number of acquired balls for each role is calculated, the total number of winning balls obtained by winning the winning award is obtained. The prize ratio is, for example, a ratio of the total number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening during the big hit with respect to the total number of winning balls for each winning.

  As shown in FIG. 17B (I), the discharge ball number area is a storage area having a size of 1 byte, and is used for storing values of 0 to 99 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 17B (II), the acquired ball number area is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes, and is used for storing values of 0 to 1500.

  As shown in FIG. 17B (III), each winning ball area for each role is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes, and is used for storing a value of 0 to 65535. In addition, each acquired ball area for each accessory may be a storage area having a size of 3 bytes or more. Moreover, when exceeding an upper limit, it keeps at an upper limit (65535). The number-of-acquisition ball number area for each role is an area for storing the total number of winning balls for winning at the plurality of general winning holes 35, and the total number of winning balls for winning at the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1). , An area for storing the total number of winning balls for winning in the normal variation winning device 37 (start port 2), an area for storing the total number of winning balls for winning the big winning opening during the big hit, Corresponds to an area for storing the total number of winning balls by winning in the big winning opening during winning (other than during big hit).

[Dead performance monitoring process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout performance monitoring process. The payout performance monitoring process is executed in step A2211 of the winning number counter update process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of discharged balls is 100 (predetermined number) or more (A2301). When the number of discharged balls is smaller than 100 (the result of A2301 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2313. When the number of discharged balls is 100 or more (the result of A2301 is “Y”), in order to update the payout rate displayed on the payout rate display unit 67 to the latest payout rate, the acquired ball count area (RWM) The value of (inside) is loaded (A2302). In the acquired number of balls area, the number of acquired balls per 100 discharged balls (the total number of winning balls), that is, the payout rate is stored. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of acquired balls is 100 or more (A2303).

  When the acquired number of balls is smaller than 100 (the result of A2303 is “N”), the game control device 100 indicates the light emission color (red or green in the present embodiment) of the segment (light emission part) of the payout rate display part 67. The value of the segment color number area (within the RWM) for storing the color number is updated (A2304), and the segment data corresponding to the number of acquired balls (that is, the percentage of winning balls) is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (A2305). ). The segment area that does not correspond to the color number is cleared to zero. In this way, in the payout rate display section 67, it is possible to update and display the payout rate display by changing the emission color (for example, from red to green), and to inform the player that the payout rate has been updated. Can be recognized.

  In this way, by the processing of steps A2301 to A2305, every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate (the total of the number of acquired balls and the number of prize balls) is updated and displayed on the output rate display unit 67. it can. In addition, when there are a plurality of winnings at the same time at the timing when the number of discharged balls reaches 100, a plurality of winnings are determined based on a priority order predetermined for each winning mouth as shown in FIG. 15B. Adopting a winning entry with a high priority among winnings, and adding the number of winning balls that were adopted to calculate the winning rate (total number of winning balls and winning balls) (priority calculation means) ). As a result, particularly in the normal game state and the special game state, the highest possible payout rate is obtained at the timing when the number of discharged balls is 100 (predetermined number), and the player's sense of expectation for the game can be improved. Further, in the specific gaming state (the general electric power support state), since there are many winnings in the normal variation winning device 37, the winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is preferentially adopted. Note that the number of winning balls that have not been adopted among a plurality of winnings is added to the payout rate (the total number of winning balls and winning balls) in the payout performance monitoring process in the next timer interruption process.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 15C, the winning mouths are arranged in the order of winning mouths (the number of winning balls) obtained in the order of the winning mouths (general winning mouth → general winning mouth → first starting winning mouth → second starting winning mouth). When priority is given to the monitoring (calculation of the payout rate), the highest possible payout rate is obtained at the timing when the number of discharged balls reaches 100, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

  When the number of acquired balls is 100 or more (the result of A2303 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the value of the segment color number area to an initial value (for example, corresponding to red) (A2306), and “99”. The blinking segment data is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (A2307). Since the payout rate display section 67 can display only the payout rate from 0 to 99, when the number of acquired balls (the payout rate) reaches 100 or more in this way, “99” blinks in only one color (for example, red). Let In particular, in the special game state (big hit), the payout rate becomes 100 or more, but when the payout rate display is updated, the color of the payout rate display is prevented from changing frequently. In addition, during the special game state (big hit), it is possible to turn off the appearance rate display part 67 and hide the appearance rate, but in this case, the number of acquired balls (outage rate) is When updating the output rate display at 100 or more, the color change of the output rate display may be performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 prepares a command corresponding to the acquired number of balls as an effect command (A2308), and executes an effect command setting process (A2309). Thereby, the display rate 41 (the number of acquired balls) can be displayed on the display device 41 of the effect control device 300. Note that the command here corresponds to a payout rate (acquired number of balls) of less than 100 displayed in the payout rate display unit 67 (range of 1 byte).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal data regarding the payout rate in the test signal output data area in the RWM (A2310). As a result, the signal data relating to the payout rate is output to the relay board 70 and further to the external test test device through the output process (A1621 in FIG. 11) as the game information output means. Then, it is possible to confirm whether or not an error (mismatch) has occurred by comparing the yield rate output to the test firing test device with the yield rate obtained by the test firing test device. The payout rate here may be a value of 100 or more using the value loaded from the acquired number of balls area as it is. In addition, as signal data regarding the payout rate, information indicating that there was a win at a specific winning opening and the data of the number of discharged balls are output to the external test test device as they are, and the output rate is calculated by the test test device. It is also possible to configure. Next, the acquired ball number area is cleared to 0 (A2311), and the discharged ball number area is cleared to 0 (A2312).

  After step A2312, or when the number of discharged balls is smaller than 100 (the result of A2301 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines the value of the number of acquired balls for each role shown in FIG. 17B (III). The total value (total number of winning balls) is calculated (A2313). Next, the number of winning balls (the big winning opening (for big hit)), which is the sum of the number of winning balls in the big winning opening during the big hit state, is loaded (A2314), and the number of winning balls (the big winning) Based on the mouth (big hit)), (the number of winning balls / total value) × 100 (%) is calculated as the winning ratio (A2315). Here, the total value is the sum of the number of acquired balls for each role, and corresponds to the total number of winning balls obtained by winning a winning opening. The accessory ratio is calculated to the first decimal place. However, since the decimal is difficult to handle, a value 10 times the accessory ratio may be calculated.

  It should be noted that the number of winning balls used to calculate the ratio of the winnings is not only the number of winning points (big winning award (big hit)), but also the number of winning points (big winning award (small hit)) And / or the number of winning balls (ordinary variable winning device) may be included. Note that the number of winning balls (big prize opening (for small hits)) is the total number of winning balls obtained by winning the big winning opening during the small hit state. The “variable winning device” is the total number of winning balls obtained by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning port).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the segment data corresponding to the calculation result in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the accessory ratio display unit 68 (A2316). Thus, the accessory ratio can be displayed on the accessory ratio display unit 68 through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). Next, a command corresponding to the calculation result of the accessory ratio (A2315) is prepared as an effect command (A2317), and an effect command setting process is executed (A2318). Thereby, the accessory ratio can be displayed on the display device 41 of the effect control device 300. In addition, you may make the command here respond | correspond to the value (0-1000) (2 byte range) of 10 times of an accessory ratio.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal data relating to the accessory ratio in the test signal output data area (A2319). As a result, the signal data relating to the ratio of the actors is output to the relay board 70 and further to the external test test device through the output process (A 1622 in FIG. 11) as the game information output means. Then, it is possible to confirm whether an error (mismatch) has occurred by comparing the accessory ratio output to the test firing test apparatus with the accessory ratio obtained by the test firing test apparatus. In addition, as the signal data relating to the accessory ratio, it is also possible to output data of each accessory acquisition ball number as it is to an external trial test apparatus and calculate the accessory ratio with the trial test apparatus.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the value of the number of discharged balls area (A2320), calculates the value of (100−number of discharged balls) (A2321), and sets the segment data corresponding to this calculation result as the discharged balls. The data is saved in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the number display section 66 (A2322). Thus, the number of discharged balls is displayed in a countdown display on the discharged ball number display section 66 through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). In the case of counting up display, the segment data corresponding to the value of the discharge ball number area may be saved in the segment area as it is. Also, a command corresponding to the calculation result is prepared as an effect command (A2323), and an effect command setting process is executed (A2324). Thereby, in the display apparatus 41 of the production | presentation control apparatus 300, the number of discharge balls can be displayed by countdown display. The command here corresponds to the number of discharged balls (range of 1 byte) of less than 100 displayed in the discharged ball number display section 66. Thereafter, the appearance performance monitoring process ends.

  As a modified example, the value of the number of discharged balls, the value of the number of acquired balls, and the value of the number of acquired balls for each accessory are transmitted as data to the effect control device 300. An object ratio may be calculated.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine state check process is executed in steps A2020, A2022, and A2025 in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  The game control apparatus 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2401). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is the same as described in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the check target signal is ON (A2402). When the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2402 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2403), and a target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2404). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2405). The state off flag indicates a normal state with respect to an error signal, and indicates a non-touch state with respect to a touch switch signal.

  On the other hand, when the check target signal is on (result of A2402 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2406), acquires the target state on command, and prepares (A2407). Further, the target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2408). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for an error signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

  When the process of step A2405 or step A2408 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2409). If they match (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2412. If they do not match (the result of A2409 is “N”), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2410), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2411).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2412). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2413). If the updated state monitoring timer value is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2413 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the updated state monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2413 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value− The value is kept at 1 (A2414). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2415). If they match (A2415 result is “Y”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2415 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2416). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2417), and the gaming machine state check process ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout busy signal check process. The payout busy signal check process is executed in step A2026 in the winning a prize switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (A2501). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is not on (result of A2501 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an idle state flag as a determination status (A2502), and sets an off-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec). (A2503). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is on (the result of A2501 is “Y”), a busy state flag is prepared as a determination status (A2504), and an on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2505). ).

  After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the busy signal state area matches the state (ON / OFF) of the current payout busy signal (A2506). If they match (the result of A2506 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2509. If they do not coincide (the result of A2506 is “N”), the current payout busy signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (A2507), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2508).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by 1 (A2509), and determines whether the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (A2510). If the monitoring timer is less than the timer comparison value (the result of A2510 is “N”), the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  When the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (result of A2510 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by −1 and keeps the value by 1 smaller than the timer comparison value (A2511). The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A2512), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  In the payout busy signal check process, a payout busy signal flag (busy signal status) is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the timer comparison value. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the timer comparison value. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (A1309) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring a winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the normal variation winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display based on the winning is made. Prior to the start of the game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. Details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A2603) if the special figure game processing timer is not 0. The special game process timer is timed by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game process timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2619.

  If the special game process timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 corresponds to the special figure game process number. A special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process is set in the register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with a special figure game process number, and a game branch process corresponding to the special figure game process number is executed (A2607).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the effect, A special figure routine process for setting information necessary for performing the special figure changing process is executed (A2608). Details of the special figure routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a special figure stop display time, special information for performing special figure display processing, and the like. The process during the figure change is executed (A2609). Details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “2” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of jackpot or sets each jackpot if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a jackpot. A special chart display process is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process (A2610). Details of the special figure display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “3” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the big prize opening, updates the number of times of opening, and processes information necessary for performing the big prize opening opening process. Processing during fanfare / interval for setting and the like is executed (A2611). Details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if the final round is, A process for opening a special winning opening is performed to set information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball process (A2612). Details of the special winning opening open process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, A big winning opening remaining ball process for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is executed (A2613). Details of the winning prize remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “6” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure routine process (A2614). Details of the jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “7” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the big prize opening, updates the number of times of opening, sets the information necessary for performing the small hitting process, etc. Is executed during small hitting fanfare (A2615). Details of the small hitting fanfare process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game process number is “8” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hitting process for setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process (A2616). Details of the small hitting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “9” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hit remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the small hit end process (A2617). Details of the small hit remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “10” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure routine process (A2618). Details of the small hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process based on the special figure game process number is completed, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2619), and then displays the special figure 1 display. The symbol fluctuation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). And after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation control table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed (A2622). Details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning at the starting winning port 36. Is determined (A2703). If there is no winning at the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is “N”), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (in the normal power support state) (A2704).

  When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the special drawing time reduction (in the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A2707. On the other hand, if it is in the special drawing time (in the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is “Y”), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and an effect command setting process is executed ( A2706).

  That is, in the normal power support state (short-time state), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and an effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of the present embodiment, a winning is not made unless the start winning opening 36 is left-handed, and a winning is not made unless the right-handed winning device 37 is right-handed. If the player does not hit right, the game ball does not pass through the normal start gate 34. Therefore, the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed in the power-powered support state (short-time state). However, when the start winning opening 36 is won during the power-powered support state (that is, in the power-powered support state) Left-handed), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to make a right-hand shot by the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the start winning port 36 (start port 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure start port switch common process (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. Determine (A2711). If there is no winning at the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is “N”), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize at the second start prize opening (the result of A2711 is “Y”). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (A2712). If the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2714.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not an ordinary electric power fraud has occurred (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or larger than the number of fraud determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the normal power fraud is occurring. The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Accordingly, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) when the ordinary electric power fraud has not occurred (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714) Then, the special figure start port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when it is determined in A2713 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the start port switch monitoring process is also terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (A2702, A2710) in the start port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of hard random number acquisition processing.

  First, the game control device 100 sets start port no-win information indicating that there is no start port win (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (A2802). If there is no input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2710.

  When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 reads the random number latch register status (the state of the random number latch register) and determines whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register. Is determined (A2803, A2804). If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

  When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register (A2805). Information on the presence of a winning entry indicating that there is a winning is set (A2806). The prepared jackpot random number is used in the special figure start port switch common processing.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The starting port signal output count is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the start signal output number area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. Is determined (A2905). If the number of special figure hold to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) is updated by one. (A2906), and saves the target start opening winning flag (A2907).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the big hit random number prepared in step A2805 as the big hit random number of the RWM. Save in the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a winning to the start winning opening 36 (start opening 1) (A2912). If it is not a prize to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, when the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (A2913), and saved in the RWM small hit symbol random number storage area (A2914). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2915), and executes special figure hold information determination processing (A2916). Then, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is prepared as an effect command (A2917), and an effect command setting process (A2918) is executed to share the special figure start port switch. The process ends.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as starting storage is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses, as a first start storage, various random number values extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number. The random number value stored based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is stored as the second start storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2916) in the start port common process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure hold information determination process. The special figure hold information determination process is a pre-reading (preliminary determination) process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 checks the start opening prize flag saved in step A2907 to determine whether or not the start winning opening 36 (start opening 1) is a win (A3001). When it is not a prize to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3004. On the other hand, if the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (in the normal power support state) (A3002).

  The game control device 100 ends the special figure hold information determination process when it is in the special figure short time (in the normal power support state) (the result of A3002 is “Y”). On the other hand, if the special drawing time is not short (the result of A3002 is “N”), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is being made (A3003). When the big hit or the small hit is being made (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the special figure holding information determination processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the big hit or the small hit (the result of A3003 is “N”), the big hit determination processing for determining whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not Is executed (A3004). If the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3005 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (A3006), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 is set. The corresponding stop symbol information is acquired (A3007), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is a prize (A3008). When it is not a prize to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is “N”), the stop symbol information of the outage is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  When the game control device 100 wins the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not. A hit determination process is executed (A3009). If the determination result is not a small hit (the result of A3010 is “N”), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014. On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is set. Information is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes an effect command setting process (A3015). Next, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed (A3016), and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A3017). ).

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game as an effect command (A3018). ), An effect command setting process is performed (A3019), and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) Pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of start winning when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening is being opened (A3101). When the special winning opening is being opened (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. If the special winning opening is not being opened (the result of A3101 is “N”), whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed. Determine (A3102).

  The game control device 100 proceeds to the processing of step A3105 when the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3102 is “Y”). Also, if the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3105 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether or not the small hitting is being processed. (A3103). If small hitting is being processed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. If the small hit process is not in progress (the result of A3103 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball process is in progress ( A3104). Since the special figure game process number does not shift to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes 0, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

  When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring processing. If the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. Then, 0 is set in the winning counter (A3105), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 39a) (A3106).

  When there is no input to the big prize opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 39a). (A3110). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “Y”), a special winning prize count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107), and an effect command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3109), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 39a) (A3110).

  When there is no input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the prize counter is 0 (A3114). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is “Y”), a special winning prize count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111), and an effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by 1 (A3113), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

  When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3114 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (A3115). When the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (result of A3115 is “Y”), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is ended, and when the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (result of A3115 is “N”), small It is determined whether or not the hit remaining ball is being processed (A3116).

  When the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3116 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3116 is “ N "), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the number of winning prizes (A3117), and the number of winning prizes is the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example," 9 " ) It is determined whether or not the above has been reached (A3118).

  The game control apparatus 100 ends the big prize opening switch monitoring process when the big prize mouth count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A3118 is “N”). Also, when the number of winning prizes exceeds the upper limit (the result of A3118 is “Y”), the number of winning prizes is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether small hitting is being processed (A3121).

  When the game control device 100 is not processing the small hits (the result of A3121 is “N”), the game winning device switch monitoring process is terminated and the small hits are being processed (the result of A3121 is “Y”). Then, the value of the end of the small hit release operation is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (A3122), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is finished. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3205). If the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3205 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (A3209), and if the customer waiting demo has not started (A3209). If the result is "N"), a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area to indicate that the customer waiting demo state is in effect (A3210) (A3210).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares the customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3211), performs an effect command setting process (A3212), and sets “0” related to the special figure normal process as the process number ( A3213). On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started in step A3209 (the result of A3209 is “Y”), “0” related to the special figure routine process is set as the process number (A3213). Thereafter, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A3214), and the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216), and the special figure routine processing is terminated.

  Thus, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) are 0, and the customer wait demo command is received. The produced effect control device 300 performs a setting for displaying the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41 or the like. Note that the game control device 100 may be configured to transmit a customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 becomes an off signal.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 2 change start process (A3202), and the decoration special corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is executed. A figure hold number command (decoration special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), an effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 1 change start process (A3206), and displays the special figure 1 hold number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. A figure hold number command (decoration special figure 1 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3207), an effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

  In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the special figure 1 hold number check, if the special figure 2 hold number is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) in the special figure ordinary process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

  The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). Details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Further, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404). Details of the special figure information setting process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406). Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a change start information setting process for setting change start information of the special figure 1 change display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 change start process. Details of the change start information setting process will be described later.

  Then, the game control device 100 sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value (for example, the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure ordinary process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 28 is performed on the second start memory. Is what you do.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is prepared (A3505).

  After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507).

  Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves a signal related to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value (for example, the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blink control timer area. 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the shift information in the small hit flag area (A3601), and saves the shift information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (A3603), and the special figure big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. (A3604). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not is executed (A3605).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is a big hit (the result of A3606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 1 in which the loss information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607) and end the big hit flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3606 is “N”), whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a big hit A small hit determination process is executed to determine whether or not (A3608).

  When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 displays the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the loss information is saved in step A3601. Overwriting and saving (A3610), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 is set while the information is lost in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. The process ends. As described above, in this embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 30 is performed on the second start-up memory.

  The game control device 100 first saves the shift information in the big hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. (A3703). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not is executed (A3704).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 2 in which the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the big hit determination process (A3605, A3704) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure hold information determination process.

  The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a judgment result other than a jackpot (A3807) and ends the jackpot determination process. To do.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the big hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (probability change state). (A3803). If the state is a high probability state (the result of A3803 is “Y”), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, when the state is not a high probability state (the result of A3803 is “N”), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (A3805).

  When the upper limit determination value of the jackpot random number value is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3806). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “Y”), the judgment result is set to a deviation (other than the big hit) (A3807). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3806 is “N”), the big hit is set as the determination result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure hold information determination process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (see FIG. 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3901). Note that “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit judgment lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment upper limit that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

  Naturally, the range of the small hit determination value (between the small hit lower limit determination value and the small hit upper limit determination value) is set to the aforementioned big hit determination in order to avoid the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game being a small hit and a big hit. The range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value) does not overlap. In this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit. However, a configuration in which an original small hit random number is provided is also possible.

  When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the judgment result (A3903), The determination process ends.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3901 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the big hit random number value of the target (see FIG. 1) is the lower hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (A3902). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A3902 is “Y”), a deviation is set as the determination result (A3903). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A3902 is “N”), the big hit is set as the determination result (A3904). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4003).

  Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). By this processing, the type of special result (type of jackpot) is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4007).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence / absence of the normal power support state (short time state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). And the game control apparatus 100 prepares the decoration special figure command corresponding to a stop symbol pattern (A4018).

  The effect mode transition information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of jackpot (the result of A4001 is “Y”) and is used in the jackpot end process described later. In other words, the presentation mode can be shifted with the big hit as a trigger by the presentation mode transition information. Also, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the big hit stop symbol pattern (whether it is a probable big hit symbol / normal big hit symbol, etc.), so the big hit ends with the type of big hit symbol (type of big hit) The transition destination of the production mode to be changed later is changed. In addition, since the production mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above, the transition destination of the production mode is also affected by whether or not the special figure high probability state (probability variation state) is currently being performed.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of A4001 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and when the big hit flag is a small hit (result of A4011) Is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special symbol small bonus symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4011). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4012), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4013).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and saves effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be shifted in response to the small hit. Then, a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4018).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is “N”), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped as a stop symbol pattern. Save in the area (A4017), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (A4019), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4020). This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure one little hit The symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101), and if it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is “Y”), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4103). Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). By this processing, the type of special result (type of jackpot) is selected.

  After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction judgment data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence / absence of the normal power support state (short time state) after the end of the big hit state.

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of jackpot (the result of A4101 is “Y”), and is used in the jackpot end process described later. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4110), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the special decoration figure command is saved in the special decoration figure command area (A4113), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4114). This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116). The setting process ends.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In the present embodiment, the probability state (low probability / high probability, with / without time) does not directly affect the change distribution, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the change distribution. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence / absence of the short time state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the first-half variation group selection pointer table (A4201), and acquires the first-half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, the first variation group selection offset table is set (A4203), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4204). .

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 adds the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used to select a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number when the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation as a result. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variation group selection pointer table (A4207), and acquires the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4208). Next, the latter half variation group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4210).

  Next, the game control device 100 adds the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special figure information setting. The process ends. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (reach type (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach rate becomes low when the number of holds is large). Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process.

  The fluctuation pattern includes a first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and a second half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a variation group selection address table (A4301), acquires an address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2, prepares it (A4302), and sets a target variation pattern random number. A fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from one storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter-half variation group table differs depending on whether it is a hit or not. Specifically, the hit use has a 1-byte size and the out-use use has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the occurrence rate of loss, and even 1 byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the use is 1 byte size. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used for the hit. In addition, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more various effects appear, the size for removal is a 2-byte size.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order (A4304), and when it is out of place (the result of A4304 is “Y”), performs a 2-byte distribution process (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. On the other hand, if it is not out of place (the result of A4304 is “N”), a distribution process (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A4307.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (reserved) Fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from (for Equation 1) and prepared (A4308). Then, a sorting process is executed (A4309), the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (A4310). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4311), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the variation pattern random number is stored from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). 3 is loaded and prepared (A4314). Thereafter, a sorting process (A4315) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, details of the 2-byte sorting process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of 2-byte sorting processing. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  First, the game control device 100 checks whether the top data of the selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table prepared in A4302) is a code with no distribution (ie, “0”) (A4401). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach” is defined. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

  When the first data in the selection table (second-half variation group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the data address corresponding to the distribution result. (A4407) and the 2-byte sorting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the top data of the selection table (second-half variation group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is “N”), the first distribution specified in the selection table (second-half variation group table) A value is acquired (A4403).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random value prepared in step A4303 (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (A4404), and the calculated new random value Is smaller than “0” (A4405). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4405 is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403. Perform the following processing. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the new random value is subtracted from the random value determined in the previous step A4405. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4405).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4405 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the latter half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variation selection table defined in the selection table (the latter half variation group table). If it is determined in step A4405 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (result of A4405 is “Y”), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (A4407), 2 bytes. The distribution process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the distribution process. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  First, the game control device 100 first data of the target selection table (the latter-half variation group table prepared in A4302, the latter-half variation selection table prepared in Step A4307, or the first-half variation selection table prepared in Step A4313). Is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (A4501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are associated with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that does not require distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  Then, the game control device 100, when the top data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “Y”), The address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (A4507), and the distribution process is terminated. On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table) is not an unsorted code (result of A4502 is “N”), the target selection table (second half fluctuation) One sort value first specified in the group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4503).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random value (the value of the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, or the variation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314. Then, a new random value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4505). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “N”), the address is updated to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), and the process proceeds to step A4503. Perform the following processing.

  That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the disturbance determined in the previous step A4505. A new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “Y”). As a result, at least one second-half fluctuation selection table, second-half fluctuation pattern (second-half fluctuation number) or first-half fluctuation pattern (first-half fluctuation pattern) specified in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table). Any one of the latter half variation selection table, the latter half variation pattern (the latter half variation number), or the first half variation pattern (the first half variation number) is selected from among the (variation numbers).

  If the game control apparatus 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. (A4507), the distribution process is terminated.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the change start information setting process.

  The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (A4603). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (A4604), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (A4605).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 adds the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value (A4606), and saves the addition value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as a production command (A4609), and a production command setting process is performed (A4610). ). Next, the special symbol holding number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the empty area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a symbol stop command (a special symbol 1 symbol stop command or a special symbol 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the symbol being changed as an effect command (A4701), and executes an effect command setting process. (A4702). The changing symbol can be discriminated from the changing symbol discriminating flag (the special Fig. 1 fluctuation flag or the special Fig. 2 fluctuation flag). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decoration special figure fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game or decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special-figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, 800 msec is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, the display time is set at 2000 msec.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a process number “2” related to the special figure display process (A4705), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4706).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707). A4708).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in a symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal related to the number of executions of the special symbol variable display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

  After that, the game control device 100 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the special figure 1 variable display game control information on the special figure 1 display 51. (A4710). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4711). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure display processing. FIG. 42A shows the first half of the special figure display processing, and FIG. 42B shows the second half of the special figure display processing.

  The game control device 100 first loads the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process (A5101), and clears the RWM small hit flag area (A5102). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 set process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (A5103), the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (A5104).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A5105), and if it is a big hit (the result of A5105 is "Y"), the big hit of the second special figure variable display game Test signal related to the start of (Special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is on, the accessory continuous actuator operating signal is on, the special symbol 2 signal is on) in the test signal output data area of the RWM Save (A5108) and set the round number upper limit table (A5109).

  On the other hand, if the result of the check of the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A5105 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A5106). In some cases (the result of A5106 is “Y”), a test signal related to the start of a big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is on, the accessory continuous operating device is operating) The signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5107), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table is executed (A5109).

  After that, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value (for example, 4, 16) corresponding to the round number upper limit information and saves it in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (A5110). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5111).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepares it as an effect command (A5112), and executes an effect command setting process (A5113). ). After that, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of a hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A5114). A setting process is executed (A5115). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the round number upper limit value is prepared as an effect command (A5116), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5117).

  Next, the game control device 100 sends a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a winning result in the special game variable display game and the special graphic variable display game to the outside of the RWM and the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number. Save in the information output data area (A5118). In the present embodiment, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Note that ON / OFF of the two jackpot signals and the three jackpot signals is determined by the winning prize opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is on when the jackpot with a ball is present (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), the jackpot without a ball (so-called sudden hit jack, etc.). When the information is the big prize opening information 1), it is turned on when it is a big hit in the short time state, and is turned off otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is turned on when a big hit with a ball is off and turned off when a big hit without a ball.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big winning fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponds to the winning opening information and the probability state of the winning result in the normal variation display game and the special variation display game. ) Is set (A5119), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (A5120). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (A5121). As a result, the information on the probability state of the special figure when the special result occurs, and the short-time state (general power support state) are stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the large winning opening illegal number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) corresponding to the large winning opening information (A5122), and the large corresponding to the large winning opening information. A fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the winning opening (A5123). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5124), and the special figure display process is terminated. In other words, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable winning device 39 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game. Special gaming state generating means for generating a state is provided.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of A5106 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (A5125). When the small hit flag is a small hit (the result of A5125 is “Y”), a high probability variation number update process for updating the high probability variation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the special figure high probability state is performed. Execute (A5126). Subsequently, an effect mode information check process related to the setting of the effect mode is executed (A5127), and whether or not the special figure has a high probability (the special probability (big hit) occurrence probability of the special figure variation display game is in the high probability state). It is determined whether or not (A5128).

  When the special control high probability is not in effect (the result of A5128 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 loads the special display command from the special display command area, prepares it as a display command (A5129), and sets the display command. The process is executed (A5130). Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5131), an effect command setting process is executed (A5132), and the process proceeds to step A5133.

  Further, the game control device 100 proceeds to the processing of step A5133 when the special figure high probability is in effect (the result of A5128 is “Y”). As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special figure has a high probability (in the probability variation state), the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is given to the player. In order not to be conscious, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the special figure game mode flag and saves the loaded flag in the special figure game mode flag saving area (A5133). Thereafter, the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (A5134) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A5125 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a high probability variation number update process (A5135) and an effect mode information check process related to the setting of the effect mode ( A5136). Then, a switching preparation remaining rotation number (switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the effect mode number is set (A5137), and whether or not the effect remaining rotation number (effect remaining game number) matches the switching preparation remaining rotation number. Is determined (A5138). The remaining number of rotations for preparation for switching may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value in any effect mode of the plurality of effect modes. (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.

  When the remaining effect rotation speed does not match the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (result of A5138 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” related to the special figure routine process as the process number (A5141).

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 prepares an effect mode switching preparation command as an effect command (A5139) when the remaining effect rotation speed matches the remaining switch preparation rotation speed (result of A5138 is “Y”). After the command setting process (A5140), “0” related to the special figure routine process is set as the process number (A5141). The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched (several games before). By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, It is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the production across the modes.

  Thereafter, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A5142), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A5143), and the special figure display in-process is terminated.

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, the details of the high probability variation number update process (A5126, A5135) in the special figure display process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of high probability variation number update processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure has a high probability (during the probability variation state) (A5201). If the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A5201 is “N”), the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

  When the game control apparatus 100 is in the special figure high probability (the result of A5201 is “Y”), the high probability variation count is updated by −1 (subtracted by 1) (A5202), and the high probability variation count is 0. It is determined whether or not (A5203). When the high probability variation number is not 0 (the result of A5203 is “N”), that is, when the high probability state continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

  When the number of times of high probability variation becomes 0 (the result of A5203 is “Y”), that is, when the high probability state ends in this special figure variation display game, the game control apparatus 100 has a high probability notification flag. The area is cleared (A5204), and a signal related to the end of the high probability state (for example, two jackpot signals are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (A5205).

  Next, the game control device 100 signals the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal Is turned off, the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5206). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since the normal figure only changes the probability state, the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always off. After that, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (A5207), and the ordinary low probability flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (A5208).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & short timeless flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5209). Then, a signal related to the left hand instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5210), and the game state display number 2 area is turned off to turn off the first game state display unit 57. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A5211), and the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (A5127, A5136) in the special figure display process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect mode information check process. The effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special figure variation display game is other than the big hit (small hit or miss).

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5401). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5401 is “Y”), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  In addition, when the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (the result of A5401 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 has an effect remaining rotation speed that is the number of times that the special figure variable display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed. Is updated by -1 (A5402), and it is determined whether the remaining number of rotations of the effect has become 0 (A5403). If the remaining effect rotation speed is not 0 (the result of A5403 is “N”), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the remaining number of rotations of the effect becomes 0 (the result of A5403 is “Y”), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (A5404). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (A5405).

  Then, the game control device 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the effect mode number area in the RWM (A5406), and acquires the remaining effect rotation number (initial value) of the effect mode to be transferred. Then, it saves in the effect remaining rotation speed area in the RWM (A5407), acquires the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A5408). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set production mode number is prepared (A5409), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5410). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (the result of A5410 is “Y”), that is, when the state of the probability has not changed, the effect mode information check process is terminated.

  If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (result of A5410 is “N”), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5411). ), Execution command setting processing is executed (A5412). Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotational speed is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5414).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number as an effect command (A5415), and executes an effect command setting process (A5416). Next, it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (A5417). If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (the result of A5417 is “N”), the effect mode information check process is terminated. If the mode is a left-handed mode (the result of A5417 is “Y”), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A5418), an effect command setting process is executed (A5419), and the effect mode The information check process ends. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (A5124) in the special figure display process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “3”, which is a process number related to the fanfare / interval process (A5501), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (A5502).

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, one big hit signal is on (output with big hit + small hit) and four big hits are on (output with big hit)). Save in the output data area (A5503), signals related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state The signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A5504). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since the normal figure only changes the probability state, the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always off. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (A5505), a number without time is saved in the game state display number area (A5506), and the normal game mode flag area is displayed. Save the usual low probability flag (A5507).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A5508), and turns off the game state display LED (third game state display unit) 59 provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The high probability notification flag area is cleared (A5509), and the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5510). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A5511), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the high probability state The high probability variation frequency area for managing the number of games is cleared (A5512). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state (the ordinary power support state) are terminated.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves the number of the effect mode 1 in the effect mode number area (A5513), clears the effect remaining rotation speed area (A5514), and saves the no-update code in the next mode transition information area. (A5515). Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5516), and the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5517), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the production mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special gaming state (big hit state).

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (A5134) in the special figure display mid-process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “7” relating to the small hit fanfare process as the process number (A5601), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A5602).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) in the special game processing timer area (A5603), and turns on a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one signal for the big hit) Is saved in the external information output data area (A5604), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area. (A5605).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the prize winning portion illegal winning number region (A5606), and saves the fraud monitoring out-of-period monitoring flag in the large winning mouth illegal monitoring period flag region (A5607). Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5608), and the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 57) is turned on. The right-handed state number is saved in the state display number 2 area (A5609), and the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 is completed.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A2611) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 updates the number of rounds (R) in the special gaming state by +1 (A5701), and prepares a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state (big hit state) as an effect command (A5702). Then, an effect command setting process (A5703) is performed.

  After that, the game control device 100 sets a special winning opening operation determination table (A5704), and acquires an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number (A5705). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (A5706). When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (the result of A5706 is “Y”), the large winning opening opening time for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (A5707). When the number of rounds is less than or equal to the opening switching determination value (the result of A5706 is “N”), the large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening is saved in the special game processing timer area (A5708).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 sets the process number to “4” related to the process for opening the big prize opening (A5709), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A5710). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5711), and the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening is stored. The information in the mouth count number area is cleared (A5712). Then, the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5713), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, as the big winning opening information indicating the big hit pattern, the big winning opening information 1 (4R: all short opening), the big winning opening information 2 (16R: all long opening), the big winning opening. Opening information 3 (16R: 1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), special prize opening information 4 (4R: all long open), big prize opening information 5 (16R: all long open), large Winning mouth opening information 6 (16R: 1 to 8R is long opening, 9 to 16R is short opening), big winning opening information 7 (16R: 1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening) is set. Yes.

  Accordingly, in the big prize opening operation determination table, the big prize opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the big opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are displayed. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4” in association with each other. Then, an opening operation is performed so that long opening is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, and short opening is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special prize opening process (A2612) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process of the present embodiment.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM ( A5901). If it is not the final round (the result of A5901 is “N”), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (A5902), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired (A5903). It is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the gaming state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (A5904).

  When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (the result of A5904 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) as the special game processing timer. The area is saved (A5905), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared as an effect command (A5907), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5910).

  When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value (the result of A5904 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) to the special game processing timer area. (A5906), an interval command is prepared as an effect command (A5907), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5910).

  When the game control device 100 is in the final round (the result of A5901 is “Y”), the remaining ball processing time (for final use) (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (A5908). An ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared as an effect command (A5909), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5910).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 sets the process number to “5” related to the winning ball remaining ball process (A5911), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (A5912). Thereafter, off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5913), and the special winning opening opening process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (A2613) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the winning prize remaining ball processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM ( A6101).

  Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (result of A6101 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the big prize opening operation determination table (A6102) and corresponds to the big prize opening information. An open switching determination value to be acquired is acquired (A6103), and a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (A6104).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (A6105), and when the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (A6105) The result is “Y”), and the process proceeds to step A6109. If the number of rounds is less than or equal to the opening switching determination value (the result of A6105 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A6106).

  Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect in which a round continuation notification effect for notifying whether or not the big hit round continues is executed, and that the big hit round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect. Specifically, the big prize opening information indicating the big hit pattern includes the big prize opening information 2 (16R: all long opening) and the big opening opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R are long opening, 5 to 16R are When one of “short open” is selected, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round, and the round continuation notification effect is executed at the 4th round. If the big prize opening information is the big prize opening information 2, the round continuation informing effect is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big prize opening is opened with the long opening in the rounds after the 5th round. If it is the big winning opening information 3, the round discontinuation notification is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big winning opening is opened with a short opening in the rounds after the 5R.

  The game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the process of step A6109 when the special winning opening information is not the value of the rank down effect system (result of A6106 is “N”). If the winning prize opening information is a rank-down effect value (the result of A6106 is “Y”), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (A6107). If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (the result of A6107 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A6109.

  Further, when the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (the result of A6107 is “Y”), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, the game control apparatus 100 has an interval time for rank-down effect (for example, 3. 6 seconds) is set (A6108), and the process proceeds to step A6109. The number of special rounds is not limited to one, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 saves the interval time set in step A6104 or A6108 in the special game processing timer area (step A6109), and sets “3” which is the processing number related to the fanfare / interval processing. (A6110). Next, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A6111), and a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 39) (for example, the signal for operating the special electric accessory 1 is turned off) is tested. The data is saved in the signal output data area (A6122), and the winning prize remaining ball processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (the result of A6101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the special-purpose game mode flag that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived. The flag is loaded from the area (A6112), the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening release information, and the stop symbol pattern is set (A6113), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is specified. The game is saved in the game process timer area (A6114).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 sets “6” as the process number related to the big hit end process (A6115), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6116). After that, the information on the number-of-winners count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (A6117), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (A6118). The information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the gaming state is cleared (A6119).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the information in the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds (A6120), and stores the big winning prize storing the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening. Clear the information in the mouth opening information area (A6121), and in the test signal output data area, signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 39) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is off) Save (A6122), and finish the winning ball remaining ball processing.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the big hit end process (A2614) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time reduction determination data includes time reduction operation data (A6201). When it is not the short-time operation data (result of A6201 is “N”), the big hit end setting process 1 is executed (A6202), and when it is the short-time operation data (result of A6201 is “Y”), the big hit end setting process 2 Is executed (A6203).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets an effect mode information address table (A6204), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set in the stop symbol setting process (particularly A4009, A4109) at the start of fluctuation. (A6205), the effect mode number (effect mode number) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (big hit state) is acquired and saved (A6206).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the effect remaining rotation number (initial value) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (A6207), and the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The next mode transition information is acquired and saved (A6208).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (A6209), and saves the prepared probability information command as an effect command in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A6210). ), Execution command setting processing is executed (A6211).

  Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the special gaming state (big hit state), the presence or absence of time reduction (general power support), and the production mode. As the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that include information on the production mode in either “high probability / with time” or “high probability / without time”. In the present embodiment, the probabilistic state is always obtained when the big hit ends (so-called ST state is always obtained), so the probability information commands include “high probability / short time / effect mode A”, “high probability / short time / effect mode”. “B”, “High probability / with time reduction / direction mode C”, and “High probability / without time reduction / direction mode A”. Although not used in this process, there are “low probability / no time reduction / production mode A”, “low probability / no time reduction / production mode B”, and “low probability / no time reduction / production mode C”.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed as an effect command (A6212), and executes an effect command setting process (A6213). Then, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared as an effect command (A6214), and an effect command setting process is executed (A6215).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is a short time (general power support) after the end of the jackpot (A6216). When there is a short time (general power support) (the result of A6216 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A6219. When there is no time saving (normal power support) (the result of A6216 is “N”), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A6217), an effect command setting process is executed (A6218), and the process of step A6219 is performed. Transition.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (A6219) and ends the jackpot end process.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6202) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 1.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the absence of the time-saving state (for example, two jackpot signals are turned off) in the external information output data area (A6301), and signals related to the start of the high-probability state and the absence of the time-shortening state (for example, Special symbol 1 high probability state signal on, special symbol 2 high probability state signal on, special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal off, special symbol 2 variable time shortening state signal off, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal off OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302).

  Next, a number without a short time state is saved in the game state display number area (A6303), a low figure probability flag is saved in the usual game mode flag area (A6304), and a special figure is displayed in the special figure game mode flag area. Save high probability & no short time flag (A6305). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation frequency area (A6306), and a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6307). In order to extinguish the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the left-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6308), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended. .

[Big jackpot end setting 2]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6203) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start of the time-saving state (for example, two jackpot signals are turned on) in the external information output data area (A6401). Since the signal related to the start of the short-time state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned on, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is turned on, and the special symbol 2 variation The time shortening state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6402).

  Next, a number with a short time state is saved in the game state display number area (A6403), a common high probability flag is saved in the common game mode flag area (A6404), and a special figure is displayed in the special game mode flag area. Save the flag with high probability & short time (A6405). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation number area (A6406), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the short-time state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the setting for the right-handed end setting process 2 is not performed.

[Special figure transition setting process 2]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2. The special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is executed in step A6219 in the jackpot end process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets “0” as the process number related to the special figure routine process (A6501), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6502).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the big hit (for example, one signal for the big hit is OFF, three signals for the big hit are OFF, and four signals are OFF for the big hit) in the external information output data area (A6503). Signals related to termination (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous actuator operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 signal is turned off) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A6504).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the information in the time reduction determination flag area (A6505), clears the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit (A6506), and in the effect mode transition information area The information is cleared (A6507). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (A6508), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6509).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the RWM discharge ball count area to 0 (A6510), and saves the segment data of “00” display of the discharge ball count in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the discharge ball count display section 66. (A6511). Thus, the number of discharged balls can be displayed as “00” on the discharged ball number display section 66 when the big hit ends, via the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11).

  In addition, the game control device 100 clears the RWM acquired ball number area to 0 (A6512), sets the segment color number area value to an initial value (for example, corresponding to red) (A6513), 'Is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (for example, the red display area) (A6514). Note that segment areas that do not correspond to color numbers (for example, green display areas) are cleared to zero. As a result, through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11), the payout rate display unit 67 can display the output rate as “00” when the big hit ends. Thereafter, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

  In the big hit state (special game state), the number of acquired balls (that is, the payout rate) which is the sum of the number of winning balls per 100 discharged balls is very large. For this reason, at the end of the big hit state, the number of discharged balls (and thus the number of discharged balls) and the number of acquired balls (and thus the number of balls) are cleared to 0, and the number of balls acquired (that is, the number of balls) To start accurate measurement. Further, at the end of the big hit state, the discharge ball number display and the output rate display are reset to “00” display. However, since it is more accurate to measure the bonus rate continuously from the power-on of the gaming machine 10, the bonus-number-acquired ball number area (and thus the bonus rate) is not cleared to 0 even after the end of the big hit state. And the accessory ratio display is continuously displayed before and after the big hit without being reset.

  As described above, the processing of steps A6510 to A6514 is performed when the big hit ends (at the end of the big hit), the number of discharged balls, the number of balls to be played (the total number of winning balls), the number of balls to be discharged, and the number of balls to be displayed. Is configured to reset to an initial value (here, 0 or “00”).

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare processing (A2615) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit fanfare process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “8” for the small hitting process as the process number (A6701), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6702).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big prize opening in the small hit game in the special game processing timer area (A6703), and signals related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, The special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6704). Next, in order to open the open / close door 39c of the special variable prize winning device 39, on data for turning on the big prize opening solenoid 39b is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (A6705).

  After that, the game control device 100 clears the information of the big winning count count area storing the number of wins to the big winning opening (A6706), and the small hitting operation initial value (for example, “0”) in the small hitting middle control pointer area. ) Is saved (A6707), and the small hitting fanfare processing is terminated.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, details of the middle hit process (A2616) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first loads the value of the control pointer during small hitting (A6801), and determines whether or not the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting operation end value (eg, “6”) (A6802). . If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hitting operation end value (result of A6802 is “N”), the small hitting control pointer is updated by +1 (A6803), and the small hitting operation transition setting process is executed (A6804). The hit processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting action end value (the result of A6802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads a flag from the special-purpose game mode flag save area (A6805). It is determined whether or not the flag is a flag related to the high probability of special figure (A6806). Thereby, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit in the special figure high probability. In this case, it does not matter whether or not the time-short state is in effect.

  When the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (the result of A6806 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “9” relating to the small hit remaining ball process as the process number (A6809). If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (the result of A6806 is “N”), the command on the small hit end screen is prepared as an effect command (A6807), and an effect command setting process is executed ( A6808), “9” relating to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (A6809).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6810). Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (A6811), and the off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (A6812). The process ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hit operation transition setting process (A6804) in the small hit middle process will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting action transition setting process.

  The game control device 100 first executes a branch process according to the control pointer (the control pointer during small hits) (A6901). When the control pointer is 0, 2, or 4, the wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special game processing timer area (A6902), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. (A6903), the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the control pointer is 1, 3, or 5, the game control device 100 saves the special winning opening opening time (for example, 200 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special game processing timer area (A6904), The ON data is saved in the mouth solenoid output data area (A6905), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, after the 300 msec small hit fanfare time, the 200 msec opening and the 1500 msec closing are alternately performed, and the small hitting control pointer is sequentially updated at the end of the opening and at the end of the closing. . Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 msec opening to the first 1500 msec closing), the small hit midway control pointer is updated to 0, and the first 1500 msec closing is performed. At the end (that is, when switching from the first 1500 msec closing to the second 200 msec opening), the small hitting control pointer is updated to 1, and at the end of the second 200 msec opening, the small hitting control pointer is updated to 2. The small hitting control pointer is updated to 3 at the end of the second 1500 msec closing, the small hitting control pointer is updated to 4 at the end of the third 200 msec opening, and the small hit at the end of the third 1500 msec closing. The middle control pointer is updated to 5. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec release, the small hitting control pointer is updated to 6, and after the elapse of the 1900 msec small hitting remaining ball time and the subsequent 100 msec small hitting ending time, the small hitting state ends. Therefore, after the fourth 200 msec opening, it is closed for 2000 msec, so the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball process (A2617) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit remaining ball processing.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “10” for the small hit end process as the process number (A7201), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (A7202).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 second) in the special-purpose game processing timer area (A7203), and signals related to the end of the small hitting operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 The operation signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7204). Next, the information of the big winning count number area is cleared (A7205), the information of the small hitting middle control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 is cleared) (A7206), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (A2618) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit end process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag saving area (A7301), and determines whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the high probability of special figure (A7302). If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (the result of A7302 is “N”), the effect mode information address table is set (A7303) and set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set). The table address corresponding to the effect mode transition information is acquired (A7304).

  Then, the game control device 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the effect mode number area in the RWM (A7305), acquires the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred, and stores it in the RAM. Is saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (A7306), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and is saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A7307). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (A7308), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A7309). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (the result of A7309 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A7319.

  In addition, when the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (the result of A7309 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sends the prepared probability information command to the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery. (A7310), and the effect command setting process is executed (A7311). Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared as an effect command (A7312), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7313). Further, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared as an effect command (A7314), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7315).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (A7316), and when it is not a left-handed mode (the result of A7316 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A7319. To do. If the mode is left-handed (the result of A7316 is “Y”), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (A7317), and after performing the production command setting process (A7318), step The processing shifts to A7319.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag save area (A7319), and determines whether or not the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure short time (during the short time state) (A7320). If the loaded flag is a flag related to the special drawing time reduction (the result of A7320 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A7323. In addition, when the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special drawing time reduction (result of A7320 is “N”), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area ( A7321) In order to turn off the right-handed display LED (the first game state display unit 57), the left-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A7322), and the process proceeds to step A7323. To do.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets “0” for the special figure normal process as the process number (A7323), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A7324). A signal relating to the end of a small hit (for example, one signal for big hit is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (A7325), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, a special symbol one small hit signal is turned off) is a test signal. Save in the output data area (A7326).

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the information in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A7327), clears the information in the effect mode transition information area (A7328), and clears the information in the special figure game mode flag save area. (A7329). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A7330), and the small hit end processing is terminated.

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect command setting process for setting the effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. This effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the process executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control device 100 first reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A7401). Further, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A7402).

  If the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A7402 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes the command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7403).

  When the transmission buffer is full (the result of A7402 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 returns to the process of step A7401.

  Further, the game control device 100 reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A7404), and determines whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A7405). If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A7405 is “Y”), the process returns to step A7404.

  In addition, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A7405 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7406), and then sets an effect command. The process ends.

  As described above, the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, so that the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the effect command can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 60 shows a symbol variation control process (A2620, A2622) in the above-described special symbol game process and a symbol variation control process in a later-described general game process. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (ordinary symbol) and setting display data for the special symbol or the normal symbol.

  The game control device 100 first checks and determines whether the variation control flag relating to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the normal diagram) is changing (A7501, A7502). In the case of this embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the variation symbol number upper limit determination value, the display table 2 ( A stop address and a display table 1 (variation) address are defined.

  The game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A7503) when the changing flag relating to the symbol to be controlled is changing (the result of A7502 is “Y”). ). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in Step A2619, Step A2621, and Step A7614.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer to be controlled by −1 (A7504), determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0 (A7505), and the updated blinking control timer is updated. If it is not 0 (the result of A7505 is “N”), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  If the flashing control timer after the update is 0 (the result of A7505 is “Y”), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (A7506), and the variable symbol number of the control target is changed. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled when the changing flag relating to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (the result of A7502 is “N”). (A7509). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  The blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506 is saved as a value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer. This initial value of the blinking control timer is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated during the fluctuation time in the collective display device 50.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variation control table prepared in accordance with the game to be processed. When the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the fluctuation symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the fluctuation symbol number is set to 0, and the fluctuation symbol number is set to 0 (fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value-1). ) Is sequentially updated in the range of In steps A7508 and A7511, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) a number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of this, a round of display is repeated.

  Thus, by defining the flashing control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are completed. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Normal game processing]
Next, the details of the normal game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal game process. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general power prize switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602). Details of the power receiving prize switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, if the usual game process timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A7603). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game process timer has become 0 (A7604).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 sets the ordinary game process number. A general game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number based on the set ordinary game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call based on the usual game process number is performed to execute a game branching process corresponding to the usual game process number (A7607).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of change of the normal map display game, sets the start of change of the base map display game, sets the effect, The usual figure usual process which performs the setting etc. of information required in order to perform the process during a usual figure change is performed (A7608). Details of the routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “1” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a process for changing the normal map for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map ( A7609). Details of the process during normal map change will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “2” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the current state of the time-variable display game is successful or not. The processing for displaying a normal map for setting the opening time, setting of information necessary for performing the processing for the normal map, etc. is executed (A7610). Details of the processing for displaying a normal map will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “3” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the information necessary to continue the process during the normal drawing or to perform the remaining electric ball process. The middle processing is executed per figure (A7611). Details of the processing during the normal drawing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “4” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes the general electric ball remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the end process for the normal map (A7612). ). The details of the ordinary figure remaining sphere process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “5” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal figure end process for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (A7608). (A7613). The details of the end-of-game hitting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal figure fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the normal symbol by the normal figure indicator 53 (A7614). Thereafter, the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the ordinary symbol game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the normal game process timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control apparatus 100 executes the processes after step A7614.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the usual game process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the game state is a right-handed game (A7702). The game state to be hit to the right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a short time state (general power support state). When the game state is a right-handed game (the result of A7702 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A7705. If the game state is not right-handed (the result of A7702 is “N”), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). Receiving the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs a notification (warning) for instructing left-handed using the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 obtains the number of reserved drawings and determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7705). The game control apparatus 100, when the number of pending reservations is less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is “Y”), updates the number of reserved drawings by +1 (A7706), and corresponds to the updated number of pending orders The address of the random number storage area per hit is calculated (A7707). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7708), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is “N”), or the game control apparatus 100 determines that the number of reserved drawings is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is “ N "), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (A7602) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the normal figure is being hit, that is, whether or not the normal figure change display game is in a hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations. (A7801). If it is normal (the result of A7801 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (A7802). When there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is “Y”), the count number of the utility counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated count of the general-purpose counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, 6) (A7804). When the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A7804 is “Y”), the operation end value (for example, 4) is saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (A7805).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the loaded pointer in the normal control pointer area per ordinary figure (A7805). Finally, the ordinary game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a public power winning that exceeds the upper limit during the normal winning state, the winning end value is saved in the normal processing control pointer area at that time, and the normal variation winning device 37 is closed. So that the hit state of the usual figure ends in the middle.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not hitting the normal map (the result of A7801 is “N”), when it is determined that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is “N”). ), Or when it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit (the result of A7804 is “N”), the general power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (A7608) in the usual figure game process will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the routine of routine processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is 0 (A7901). If the number of pending maps is 0 (the result of A7901 is “Y”), “0” is set as the processing number for shifting to the routine processing of the usual diagram (A7921), and the processing number is set to the usual game processing. Save in the number area (A7922). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A7923), and the normal processing is terminated.

  In addition, when the number of pending reservations is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), the game control device 100 loads the winning random number from the random number storage area (for holding number 1) of the RWM, and the RWM The random symbol random number is loaded from the regular symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (A7902). Then, the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per usual figure and the symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) per usual figure are cleared to 0 (A7903). Furthermore, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map display game is higher than normal (high probability state), that is, whether or not it is in a short time state (normal power support state) Is determined (A7904). The probability per ordinary figure during the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per ordinary figure during the low probability is 0/251.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251), which is a lower limit determination value during a normal map low probability, when the normal probability is not high (the result of A7904 is “N”) (A7905). If the normal probability is high (the result of A7904 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1), which is the lower limit determination value in the normal probability, is set (A7906). Transition to processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7907). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of ordinary figures and the low probability of ordinary figures. If the winning random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “Y”), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step A7909. When the winning random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “N”), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7908).

  When the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7908 is “Y”), that is, in the case of a loss, the game control apparatus 100 saves the shift information in the hit flag area (A7909). Further, the stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7910), the off symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

  When the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A7908 is “N”), that is, in the case of winning, the game control device 100 saves hit information in the hit flag area (A7912), The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7913), the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. There may be several types of hit stop symbols.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the general symbol stop symbol region (A7915), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data region (A7916), and shifts the random number storage region per universal symbol. (A7917) After clearing the vacant area after the shift to 0 (A7918), the number of reserved drawings is updated by -1 (A7919).

  That is, with the execution of the usual figure change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved drawings that are on hold after the number 1 of reserved maps are incremented one by one. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes the normal-variation process transition setting process (A7920), and ends the normal chart normal process. In addition, the process transition setting process during normal map change will be described later.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a process transition setting process during normal map change. The normal change process transition setting process is executed in step A7920 in the normal figure normal process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “1” as the process number for shifting to the process for changing the usual figure (A8101), and saves the process number in the usual game process number area (A8102).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal time change time (for example, 500 msec) in the normal time game processing timer area (A8103). The normal map change time here is common between the high probability of the normal map and the low probability of the normal map. A signal related to the start of the normal map change display game (normal signal 1 changing signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8104), and a changing flag indicating that the normal map change display game is changing is displayed. Save in the figure fluctuation control flag area (A8105). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the normal display, is saved in the normal flashing control timer area (A8106), and the initial value ( In this case, “0” indicating a blank symbol is saved (A8107), and thereafter, the process for setting the transition to the normal figure change process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process during normal map change (A7609) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during normal map change.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets the process number to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the process for displaying a normal figure (A8301), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal time display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal time variable display game on the normal time display, in the normal time game processing timer area (A8303). .

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the normal change (normal symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the usual figure change display game is stopped is saved in the usual figure change control flag area (A8305), and the usual figure change process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process for displaying a normal map (A7610) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal map display process.

  First, the game control device 100 loads a hit flag (hit information or out-of-game information) set in the normal processing (A8401), and clears the RWM hit flag area (A8402). Then, it is determined whether or not hit information is set for the loaded hit flag (A8403).

  When no hit information is set for the hit flag (the result of A8403 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number for shifting to the normal routine process (A8414). The process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A8415). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8416), and the normal display processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the hit information is set for the hit flag (the result of A8403 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the hit processing setting table (A8404), and corresponds to the normal figure stop symbol information. A hit start pointer value (in this case, 0, 2, or 4) is acquired and saved in the normal control pointer area per hit (A8405). Next, a time period for opening a normal telephone (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the general-purpose stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A8406). With the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the short time state is set, and for example, it is possible to open three times.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets “3” as the process number for shifting to the middle game per process (A8407), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8408). Thereafter, a signal relating to the hit of the normal variation display game (ordinary signal per ordinary symbol is turned on) and a signal relating to the start of ordinary electric operation (ordinary electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A8409). Further, the ON data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (ON) the normal power solenoid (A8410).

  Further, the game control device 100 clears the information in the ordinary power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 (A8411), and the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37 in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period is obtained. The information stored in the area for the number of unauthorized power prizes to be stored is cleared (A8412). Finally, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8413), and the normal display processing is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal game hitting process (A7611) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal hit processing.

  First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal drawing (A8601), and the value of the loaded control pointer during the normal drawing is the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal drawing (the end of the hit). It is determined whether or not (A8602).

  When the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the upper limit value area of the control pointer during the normal map (the result of A8602 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the control during the normal map. The pointer is updated by +1 (A8603). Further, the ordinary power operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the process during the normal figure is terminated. The details of the ordinary power operation setting process will be described later.

  In addition, when the value of the control pointer during the normal figure reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal figure (the value of the end of hit) (the result of A8602 is “Y”), Without executing the process for updating (+1) the normal process control pointer area in step A8603, the normal operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the normal process in normal map is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation transition setting process (A8604) in the normal map processing will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary power operation transition setting process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer.

  The game control apparatus 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A8701). If the value of the control pointer is either 0 or 2, the process proceeds to step A8702 to control blocking of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is blocked. The later wait time (for example, 200 msec) is saved in the usual game process timer area (A8702).

  Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the general electric operation transition setting process.

  If the value of the control pointer is any one of 1 and 3, the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A8704 and controls the release of the normal variation winning device 37, so that it corresponds to the control pointer. The normal power open time (for example, 1700 msec) that is the open time of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8704). Further, ON data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn ON the normal power solenoid 37c (A8705), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  Further, if the value of the control pointer is any one of 4, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A8706 to end the release control of the normal variation winning device 37, and the ordinary power remaining ball processing (A7612) Is set as a process number (A8706), and the process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A8707).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves the ordinary power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the usual game processing timer area (A8708). Thereafter, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area in order to set the general-purpose solenoid 37c to off (A8709), and the general-purpose operation transition setting process is terminated.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (A7612) in the ordinary game process will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets a process number “5” related to the end process for the normal game (A8901), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8902). After that, the usual game ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the usual game process timer area (A8903).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 (the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (A8904). Subsequently, the ordinary power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 is cleared (A8905), and further, the normal control pointer area per ordinary figure is cleared (A8906). Thereafter, the ordinary electric power remaining ball processing is terminated.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (A7613) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the end-of-normal hit process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a process number “0” related to the usual game routine process (A9101), and further saves the process number in the usual game process number area (A9102). Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the normal game is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

  In addition, the game control device 100 saves a flag (a fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation prize winning device 37 in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104), and thereafter the per-figure end processing. Exit.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the segment LED editing process. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

  The game control device 100 first updates the blinking control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether it is the output on timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on. In the present embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, a blinking period of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

  When it is the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the common figure hold number display table 1 (A9203), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “N”). Then, the general figure hold number display table 2 is set (A9204), the display data corresponding to the general figure hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the general figure hold indicator 56 (lamps D15 and D16) (A9205). If the number of holds is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both of the table hold number display tables 1 and 2, so the figure hold indicator 56 does not flash, but if the number of holds is 3 to 4, Since the display data in the figure hold number display table 1 and the display data in the general figure hold number display table 2 are different, the common figure hold display 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9206). When it is the output on timing (the result of A 9206 is “Y”), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (A 9207), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A 9206 is “N”), the special figure 1 hold is held The number display table 2 is set (A9208), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display 54 (lamps D11 and D12) (A9209).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9210). When it is the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “Y”), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (A9211), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “N”), the special figure 2 is on hold. The number display table 2 is set (A9212), the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 (lamps D13 and D14) (A9213).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) is defined (A9214), and acquires display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer. And it saves in the segment area | region of the round display part 60 (A9215).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 (lamp D9), the third game state display unit 59 (lamp D17), etc. is defined ( A9216). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game state display part (A9217).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 57 (lamp D8) is defined (A9218). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (A9219). Thereafter, the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  The game control device 100 first turns on the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61), that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2). It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (A9301).

  When the magnet sensor is on (result of A9301 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the game control device 100 sets a magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period to +1. It is updated (A9302), and it is determined whether or not the timer has expired (A9303).

  The game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (the result of A9303 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time ( A9304), the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (A9305).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud notification command as an effect command (A9306), and prepares a magnet fraud occurrence flag indicating that a magnet fraud has occurred as a magnet fraud flag (A9307). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A9313). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interruptions) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (the result of A9301 is “N”), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected. (A9308). If the magnet fraud notification timer defining the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A9309). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (A9310). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (the result of A9303 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A9309.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9310 is “N”), that is, if the time has not expired, the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process.

  Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A9310 is “Y”), that is, the time has expired or has already expired, Is completed, or when the unauthorized notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for terminating the unauthorized magnet notification is prepared as an effect command (A9311).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a magnet fraud release flag as a magnet fraud flag (A9312), and determines whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A9313).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A9313 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, if the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag region (result of A9313 is “N”), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag region (A9314), and the production command is set. The process is executed (A9315). Thereafter, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) of the game board, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

  The game control device 100 first turns on the radio wave sensor 62 from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 121, that is, It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (A9401). When the radio wave sensor is on (result of A9401 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area ( A9402).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a board radio wave fraud notification command as an effect command (A9403), and prepares a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag indicating that a board radio wave fraud has occurred as a board radio wave fraud flag (A9404). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (A9409). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (the result of A9401 is “N”), that is, when the abnormal radio wave is not detected, the game control device 100 determines the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time. If it is not 0, -1 is updated (A9405). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (A9406). If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9406 is “N”), that is, if the time has not expired, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

  Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (the result of A9406 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, When the notification is completed or when the unauthorized notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for terminating the unauthorized broadcast notification is prepared as an effect command (A9407). Further, a board radio wave fraud cancel flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (A9408), and it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (A9409).

  When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value in the board radio wave fraud flag area (the result of A9409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. If the values do not match (the result of A9409 is “N”), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (A9410), and the effect command setting process is executed (A9411). Thereafter, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a procedure of external information editing processing. 75A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 75B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (A1305), the prize opening switch / status monitoring process (A1308), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313), Processing to create information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or a game hall internal management device, or a test firing test device, and set it in an output buffer is performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502). When the body frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9502 is “N”), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the security signal OFF data is stored in the external information output data. Save in the area (A9504).

  When the glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A9501 is “Y”), or the body frame opening error is occurring (result of A9502 is “Y”), The ON data of the frame release signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

  After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up). Judgment is made (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like (A1029 of the main process). The security signal control timer is counted from the RAM initialization time.

  When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the security data ON data in the external information output data area (A9509), and proceeds to the process of step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not a magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). In addition, when a magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that a magnet fraud is occurring. If the magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A9511). If the board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio fraud is occurring.

  If the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9511 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 further determines whether or not the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9512). If the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the ordinary power fraud is occurring (A9513). When the power transmission fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the big prize winning fraud is occurring (A9514). It should be noted that if the illegal prize occurrence flag for the big prize opening is saved in the illegal flag area, it can be determined that the big prize opening fraud is occurring. If the winning prize fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is “N”), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9515).

  On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the fraud of the magnet is occurring (result of A9510 is “Y”), when the fraud of the board is occurring (result of A9511 is “Y”), the fraud of the frame is generated. Is in the middle (the result of A9512 is “Y”), the power transmission fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is “Y”), or the prize winning fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is “ Y "), the security data ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A9516), and the gaming machine error status signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (A9517). The security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) by setting the security signal on data.

  After steps A9515 and A9517, the game control apparatus 100 executes main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9518). Details of the main prize ball signal editing process will be described later. Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a start port signal editing process for editing the start port winning signal (A9519). Details of the start port signal editing process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not 0 (A9520). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A9521). When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (the result of A9521 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is output as external information output data. The area is saved (A9522), and the external information editing process is terminated.

  In addition, when the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not 0 (the result of A9521 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 100 sends the on data of the symbol determination count signal to the external information. The output data area is saved (A9523), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A9518) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  First, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (A9601). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A9602).

  When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9602 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 further determines whether or not the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0. (A9603).

  When the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (the result of A9603 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball signal output count by −1 (A9604) and outputs the main prize ball signal output. The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved in the control timer area (A9605).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9607), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process. If the number of main prize ball signals output is 0 (the result of A9603 is “Y”), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A9608), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9602 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period. Is determined (A9606). Note that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 msec).

  When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (result of A9606 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs on data for turning on the main prize ball signal to the external information of the RWM. Save to the data area (A9607). Further, when the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (result of A9606 is “N”), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is set as the external information output data of the RWM. The area is saved (A9608), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (A9519) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port signal editing process. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  First, the game control device 100 updates −1 if the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (A9701). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (A9702).

  When the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9702 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the start port signal output count is 0 (A9703). If the number of start port signal outputs is not 0 (the result of A9703 is “N”), the start port signal output count is updated by −1 (A9704), and the start port signal output control is performed in the start port signal output control timer area. The timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved (A9705).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the ON data for turning on the start port signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9707), and ends the start port signal editing process.

  In addition, when the start port signal output count is 0 (the result of A9703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device to the external information output of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A9708), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9702 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period. (A9706). Note that the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (result of A9706 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the ON data for setting the start port signal to the ON state in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A9707), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  In addition, when the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (the result of A9706 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device to the RWM. The data is saved in the external information output data area (A9708), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production | presentation control apparatus 300 performs with the program for production control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as “B ***”.

  When the execution of the main process is started, the production control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B1001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B1002, B1003), and an interrupt is permitted (B1004). When the interrupt is permitted, a command reception interrupt process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100 is enabled.

  Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 and the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

  Subsequently, the effect control apparatus 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B1008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initial setting (B1002) and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B1009). Subsequently, hall / player setting mode processing is executed to accept operations such as changes in the brightness and volume of LEDs and liquid crystals (operations of operation means such as the production buttons 25) by players, game shop (hall) personnel, and the like. (B1010). In the hall / player setting mode, the player can customize the display and effects on the display device 41.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding or clearing effect points (B1011). For example, at the end of a game so that the production points can be carried over to the next game, the production points are added by performing the production or operation to which the production points are added. Can be displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B1012), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B1013). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 updates the various data in accordance with the content (effect) displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or sets the drawing displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The process is executed (B1014). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation to the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B1015).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether it is a frame switching timing (B1015). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B1016 is “N”), the process of B1016 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B1016 is “Y”), the display to the display device 41 is performed. The screen drawing is instructed (B1017). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when a periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice, the frame is switched. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1018).

  In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) made of LEDs or the like (B1019). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1020). In the movable body control process, for example, a solenoid is driven to execute an accessory action effect.

  And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B1008, after finishing the process of B1020 mentioned above. Thereafter, the processing from B1008 to B1020 is repeated.

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (B1013) in the main process (FIG. 78) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). When the command reception number is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to be analyzed, and the received command check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer in the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before the contents in the buffer are copied to the command area. Even if a new command is received during copying, the data is not overwritten.

  Then, the production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1 only) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The reception command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command reading indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106). If the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N ]), The process from step B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

  When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of received commands is performed separately in a command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of command reception by always ensuring a free area without directly analyzing in the reception command buffer.

  Subsequently, when the copying is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents in the analysis command area (B1107), and analyzes the received command to analyze the contents. The process is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to Fig. 80. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109), and then the process of step B1101 It is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded is completed (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is “N”), the processing from step B1107 to B1110 is performed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 79) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control apparatus 300 first separates the received command as the MODE part and the lower byte as the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE section indicating the type of command. The Therefore, the upper and lower orders of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE portion indicating the type of command (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE portion is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION portion is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the contents of the command (specific production instruction or the like) (value assigned as the command specification indicating the contents). If the ACTION part is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a decorative special symbol, and includes variation commands (A4608 and A4609). If the MODE portion represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If the MODE portion does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the big hit command (B1207). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to the effect during the jackpot (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.). For example, a fanfare command (A5116), a round command (A5702), an interval command (A5907), An ending command (A5909) or the like. If the MODE portion represents a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is “Y”), the jackpot command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  When the MODE portion does not represent the big hit command (the result of B1207 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the design command range (B1209). Note that the symbol-related commands include decorative special symbol commands (A4018, A4112) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE section represents a symbol-based command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the single-shot command (B1211). If the MODE portion represents a single command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  The effect control device 300 includes a command related to the number of balls to be discharged (A2323 in FIG. 18), a command (A2308 in FIG. 18) corresponding to the payout rate (number of acquired balls), and a command (A A2317) in FIG. 18 may be received as an effect command (single-shot command), and display setting processing for displaying the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio may be performed in the single-shot command processing. The production control device 300 may back up (store) the number of balls to be discharged, the ball payout rate, and the accessory ratio in the FeRAM 323 that can retain the stored contents even during a power failure.

  In addition, in the single-shot command processing, the effect control device 300 executes, for example, the following processing. When the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command, a RAM initialization setting process for performing RAM initialization notification or the like is executed. When the MODE unit represents a power failure recovery command or a customer waiting demo command, the power failure recovery setting processing for power failure recovery or the customer waiting demo setting processing for displaying the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like is executed. . When the MODE unit represents a special figure 1 hold number command or a special figure 2 hold number command, a special figure 1 hold information setting process or a special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed. When the MODE part represents a probability information command, a probability information setting process is executed. When the MODE unit represents an error / unauthorized command, an error / unauthorized setting process for performing an error / unauthorized notification or canceling the notification is executed. Examples of error / unauthorized commands include a fraud occurrence command (A2108), a fraud cancel command (A2116), a state off command (A2404), and a state on command (A2407). When the MODE section represents a command for effect mode switching, an effect mode switching setting process is executed.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a single command (the result of B1211 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (B1213). . The pre-read symbol commands include the above-mentioned pre-read symbol command (A3014). If the MODE portion represents a pre-read symbol system command (result of B1213 is “Y”), the pre-read symbol system command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  When the MODE portion does not represent the prefetched symbol system command (the result of B1213 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the prefetched variation command (B1215). ). The prefetch fluctuation command includes the above-described prefetch fluctuation pattern command (A3018). If the MODE portion represents a prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch fluctuation command (result of B1215 is “N”), the production control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), when the ACTION part is not in the normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( When the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis processing is terminated.

[Display screen layout example]
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a layout example of a display screen (display unit) of the display device 41.

  The display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a discharged ball number display unit 691 for displaying the number of discharged balls, a payout rate display unit 692 for displaying a payout rate, and an accessory ratio display unit 693 for displaying an accessory ratio. . In FIG. 81, 57, 36, and 59.3 are respectively displayed for the number of balls to be discharged, the rate of appearance, and the ratio of items.

  In addition, since even if it always displays on the display screen of the display device 41, the number of balls to be discharged, the amount of balls to be played, and the ratio of objects is in the way, for example, an error message (glass frame opening error, In addition to the display of the front frame opening error), the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio may be displayed.

  In addition, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010) for accepting operations by players, etc., the player can select whether to display / hide the number of balls to be discharged, the rate of play, and the ratio of bonuses, or the number of balls to be discharged It may be possible to select whether to display a payout rate or an accessory ratio. Further, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010), the number of discharged balls may be selected to be displayed on the display device 41 as a count-down display or a count-up display according to selection by the player or the like. The selection may be performed by displaying the menu on the display device 41 and operating the operation means such as the effect button 25 by the player.

  Furthermore, during the customer waiting demonstration, the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio on the display device 41 may be hidden. In addition, during the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, the latest (latest) number of balls to be discharged, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses may be displayed. In this case, the display size is only displayed during the customer waiting demonstration. If it is larger than the other cases, it can appeal to visitors of non-game amusement stores.

  The display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 610b, middle area 610c), the first special symbol in the left area 610a, the second special symbol in the right area 610b, In the middle region 610c, the third special symbol is variably displayed (in FIG. 81, the stop symbol is displayed). In addition, although the discharge ball number display part 691, the appearance rate display part 692, and the accessory ratio display part 693 are provided above the fluctuation display area 610, it is not limited to this.

  In addition, the number of discharged balls, the play rate, and the ratio of the accessory may be hidden or the display size may be reduced when disturbing the display of the change in the change display area 610 or other effects on the display device 41. It may be displayed only when the variable display is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed, or the display size may be increased.

  Similarly, in the plurality of variable display areas 615 at the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, three decorative reduced symbols (special symbols smaller than the decorative special symbols) are displayed in a variable manner. When a movie-type reach effect or the like is performed in the center of the display screen, the decorative reduced symbol may be displayed in a variable manner in the variable display area 615. In the variable display area 615, the decorative reduced symbols may be displayed in a variable manner at all times. The fluctuation display area 615 is commonly used in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. The large decorative special symbol of the variable display area 610 and the small special symbol of the variable display area 615 may be similar or completely different.

  The hold display 633 (start-up storage display) displayed on the hold display unit 630 (start-up storage display unit) is based on the special figure 1 hold information set from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command and the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. Based on the set special figure 2 hold information, the screen is drawn (B1014-B1017). The hold display 633 indicates a hold (start-up memory) related to the special figure variation display game before execution. As the hold display 633, the special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 2 hold display are arranged and displayed on the hold display unit 630 in a winning order (holding occurrence order).

  On the hold display section 630, a spherical (circular) hold display 633 is displayed in a manner in which the left display is arranged in a tilted ridge 635 with the left side lowered. Further, a hold correspondence display 633a (pending display during change) corresponding to a hold (holding during digestion) related to the special figure changing display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640 simulating the frame of the globe (frame). As the earth inside). The hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 moves from the left side of the basket 635 to the hold digestion area 640 every time the special figure variation display game is started.

  Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 for displaying the special figure 1 hold number in numbers, and a special figure 2 hold number display for displaying the special figure 2 hold numbers in numbers. A portion 660 is provided.

  A navigation character 670 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen of the display device 41. The navigation character 670 is normally arranged so as to be adjacent to and adjacent to the hold correspondence display 633a (holding digestion region 640) indicating the suspension during digestion. The navigation character 670 includes a character name display portion 670b and a meter display section in addition to the main body 670a. In addition, a line (a line notice may be used) that is displayed so that the navigation character 670 emits is displayed on the line display unit 680 in association with the navigation character 670. Note that the lines may be output as audio as well as displayed. In addition, the number of balls to be discharged, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses may be displayed according to the operation of the Navi character 670 on the screen (the number of balls to be thrown, the rate of balls to be played, and the ratio of characters to be played by the navigation character 670). To produce a display effect).

[Operations and effects of the first embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the payout control means (the payout control device 200 or the like) is such that the game ball is a winning area (general winning opening 35 or start winning opening 36) or a variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37 or special variable winning). When winning the device 39), it is possible to pay out the number of winning balls determined for the winning area and the variable winning device. The display means (the combination ratio display unit 68, the display device 41, etc.) is the ratio of the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning the variable prize device out of the total number of prize balls that are paid out (the role Property ratio) can be displayed. Accordingly, the interest of the game is improved, and the player has an impression that the player can easily win the variable winning device (an impression that many open states are generated), which is a motivation (indicator) for the player to continue playing the game.

  The counting means (the game control device 100 or the like that executes the processes of steps A2015 and A2210) is the number of discharged balls that are the number of game balls discharged from the game area, or the number of game balls that have been launched into the game area. Count the number of shot balls. The display means (the payout rate display unit 67, the display device 41, etc.) can display the total ratio (the payout rate) of the number of winning balls obtained by winning with respect to the number of discharged balls or the number of shot balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have interest and interest in the general winning opening 35. And the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  When the gaming machine is waiting for a customer, the display means (discharged ball number display unit 66, output rate display unit 67, accessory ratio display unit 68, display device 41, etc.) The accessory ratio may be hidden. That is, only when the gaming machine is not in the waiting state for the customer, the display means may display the number of balls to be discharged, the ball payout rate, and the accessory ratio. This is a privilege for a player who is playing a game, and can increase the operation of the gaming machine 10.

  Each time the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the display means (the payout rate display unit 67, the display device 41, etc.) totals the number of prize balls obtained by the predetermined number of game balls. Can be displayed. Therefore, the payout rate can be simply displayed as the total number of prize balls. In addition, the player can be interested in the general winning opening 35 and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The calculation means (game control device 100 or the like that executes a prize opening switch / status monitoring process), when there is a prize in any one of a plurality of prize areas and variable prize machines at a predetermined number of times, Based on the priority order determined for the area and the variable winning device, the number of prize balls obtained by winning one of the plurality of prizes is added to calculate the total number of prize balls. Therefore, in particular, in the normal game state and the special game state other than the general electric power support state, the total of the number of winning balls as much as possible (the play rate) at the timing when the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. ) And the player's sense of expectation for the game can be improved.

  The calculation means (game control device 100 or the like that executes the prize opening switch / status monitoring process) is the target winning area to which the number of prize balls is added depending on whether or not a specific gaming status (general power support status) has occurred. The priority order of each winning area or variable winning device can be changed. Therefore, in the specific gaming state (the general power support state), since there are many winnings to the normal variation winning device 37, the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 is preferentially adopted, and the total number of winning balls can be calculated.

  The reset means (such as the game control device 100 that executes the processing of steps A6510 to A6514) can reset the total number of winning balls (the play rate) and set it to the initial value when the special game state ends. . In the big hit state (special game state), the total number of winning balls is very large, but after the big hit state is finished, accurate measurement of the total number of winning balls (outtake rate) can be started. In addition, the reset means is the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by winning the variable prize winning device out of the total number of prize balls paid out at the end of the special gaming state (property ratio) Does not reset and remains as it is. Thereby, regardless of the big hit state (special game state), the accessory ratio can be accurately measured.

  The game information output means (such as the game control device 100 that executes the output process) can output information related to the total number of winning balls (outtake rate) and information related to the bonus rate to an external device. Therefore, whether there is a discrepancy between the total number of winning balls (outgoing rate) output to an external device such as a test firing test device and the total number of winning balls (outgoing rate) determined by an external device I can confirm.

  When the monitoring means (game control device 100 or the like that executes a winning opening switch / status monitoring process) monitors and monitors each winning area and winning to the variable winning device in the descending order of the number of winning balls obtained. If there is a win, the total number of winning balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls. Therefore, the largest possible number of winning balls (race rate) is preferentially obtained, and the player's expectation on the game can be improved.

[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. In the second embodiment, display control is executed by the payout control device 200 in addition to the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 for which display control is executed by the game control device 100. A discharge ball number display portion 851, a payout rate display portion 852, and an accessory ratio display portion 853 are provided. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are provided in the collective display device 50 on the front surface of the gaming machine 10, as in the first embodiment. The discharged ball number display portion 851, the payout rate display portion 852, and the accessory ratio display portion 853 are provided in the payout control device 200 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 10. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the discharged ball number display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 that are display-controlled by the payout control device 200 may be provided in the upper dish unit. As described above, when the discharged ball number display portion 851, the payout rate display portion 852, and the accessory ratio display portion 853 are provided in the payout control device 200 or the upper plate unit, the game board 30 is exchanged with another game board. However, it can continue to be used without being discarded, leading to cost reduction.

  In addition, the number of discharged balls display portion 851, the number of appearance balls rate display portion 852, and the ratio of accessory items display portion 853 are the same as the number of balls of discharge ball display portion 66, the number of balls output display portion 67, and the amount of accessory ratio display portion 68, respectively. It is composed of (two or three) 7-segment type (8-segment type including a point portion) display (LED lamp, display device).

  FIG. 82 is a rear view of the gaming machine 10. On the back surface of the game board 30, a game control device 100 (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner via the switch base 738 is disposed, and the game control device 100 is provided via the control base 733 above the switch base 738. An effect control device 300 is provided for controlling the display device 41 and the like based on the effect control command transmitted from. A protective cover 737 that covers the back surface of the effect control device 300 and the upper back surface of the game control device 100 is provided behind the effect control device 300. In a state where the gaming board 30 configured as described above is housed in the housing portion of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 disposed on the back surface of the gaming board 30 protrude rearward of the front frame 12. To do.

  A storage unit 750 that stores game balls replenished from a replenishing device (not shown) provided in the island facility and arranges and flows down the stored game balls is disposed on the upper rear surface of the front frame 12. . A payout unit 790 for paying out the game balls flowing down from the storage unit 750 to the upper plate 21 (see FIG. 1) is disposed on one inner side of the front frame 12.

  In addition, a payout control device 200 that controls the operation of the payout unit 790 based on data transmitted from the game control device 100 and a game ball based on the turning operation of the operation handle 24 are provided at the lower back of the front frame 12. A ball launching device 742 that launches, a connection terminal 743 that connects to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices are arranged.

  A discharge ball number display unit 851, a payout rate display unit 852, and an accessory ratio display unit 853 are arranged on the rear surface (rear surface) of the payout control device 200 (payout control board). Unlike the display unit 67 and the accessory ratio display unit 68, the display unit 67 can be viewed only from the back side of the gaming machine 10. The discharged ball number display portion 851, the payout rate display portion 852, and the accessory ratio display portion 853 are not visible to a general player, and are visible only to the related parties (employees, etc.) of the game store. Note that the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are visible only from the front side of the gaming machine 10.

  In addition, when it is not desired to show a general player the display of the number of discharged balls, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses, the number of balls to be displayed 66 on the front of the gaming machine 10, the yield rate display portion 67, The ratio display unit 68 can be omitted. In this case, only from the back side of the gaming machine 10, the display of the number of balls to be discharged, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of the items to be picked up is confirmed by the discharged ball number display unit 851, the output rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853. it can.

  Further, the payout control device 200 calculates the number of discharged balls, the payout rate (the total of the number of acquired balls and the number of prize balls), and the ratio of the bonuses based on the payout command, and the discharge provided in the payout control device 200. Display control to be displayed on the ball number display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 is performed. Note that the payout command here includes both a payout command (A1719) and an out-ball detection command (A2017) in units of one winning in the winning opening (winning area). In addition, the payout control device 200 receives the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio calculated by the game control device 100, and the discharged ball number display unit 851 provided in the payout control device 200 displays the payout rate display. The structure displayed on the part 852 and the accessory ratio display part 853 is also possible.

  The payout control device 200 is composed of a memory such as a CPU (microcomputer) and a RAM, and, like the game control device 100, is a discharged ball number area for storing the number of discharged balls, and the number of acquired balls per 100 discharged balls (award) The acquired ball number area for storing the total number of balls) and the earned ball number area for each accessory for storing the earned ball number for each accessory are stored in the memory (see FIG. 17B). The calculation method of the number of discharged balls, the payout rate (the total of the number of acquired balls and the number of winning balls), and the ratio of bonuses is the same as in the first embodiment. The out ball detection command is used to update the number of discharged balls by one.

  FIG. 83 shows a configuration example of the payout command (payout number command). The payout command is composed of 1 byte (8 bits). In the payout command, the most significant bit (first bit) is an out ball flag indicating that a ball has been entered into the out port 30b, and the second to fourth bits have been awarded to the winning port. In this case, winning hole information for specifying the winning hole is indicated, and the fifth to eighth bits indicate the number of winning balls as it is. As for the winning opening information of the second bit to the fourth bit, “001” is the general winning opening 35, “010” is the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36), and “011” is the normal variation winning apparatus 37 (starting opening). 2), “100” indicates a big winning opening (winning during a big hit), and “101” indicates a big winning opening (winning other than during a big hit such as a small hit). When the out ball flag is set to 1 (on), that is, when there is a ball entering the out port 30b, the number of prize balls is zero. As in the first embodiment, the total number of winning balls is stored in the acquired number of balls area, and the total number of winning balls for each winning opening is stored in the acquired number of balls by function as the number of acquired balls by function. The

  For example, when the payout command is expressed in hexadecimal, 10 winning balls for winning the general winning opening 35 are “1AH”, and 3 winning balls for winning the starting slot 1 are “23H”. Two prize balls for winning 2 are "32H", 14 prize balls for winning the big prize (big hit) are "4EH", 14 prize balls for winning the big prize ( The “small hit” is “5EH”, and the notification by the out-sphere detection (out-sphere detection command) is “80H”.

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
In said 2nd Embodiment, while there exist an effect similar to 1st Embodiment, the number-of-balls display part 851 arrange | positioned at the rear surface (back surface) of the payout control apparatus 200, the payout rate display part 852, and an accessory By the ratio display portion 853, the number of balls to be ejected, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses can be visually recognized even from the back side of the gaming machine 10.

[Other Embodiments]
An embodiment obtained by modifying the first embodiment and the second embodiment as follows is also possible.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the number-of-balls display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 controlled by the game control device 100 are not on the front surface of the gaming machine 10 but on the back surface of the gaming machine 10. It may be arranged. In FIG. 84, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are provided on the rear surface (rear surface) of the game control device 100 provided on the rear surface of the gaming machine 10. It is visible only from the back side. In this case, the number-of-balls display section 66, the payout rate display section 67, and the accessory ratio display section 68 can be shown only to the related parties (employees, etc.) of the amusement store without showing them to the general player. . In addition, if the discharge ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are arranged on the back surface of the gaming machine 10, there is a possibility that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 10 is not impaired for general players. is there.

  The number of balls to be ejected, the rate of appearance, and the ratio of items are displayed on the collective display device 50 on the front surface of the gaming machine 10 (the number of balls to be displayed 66, the output rate display portion 67, and the item ratio display 68). 1 of the display devices 41, not all of the display units provided on the payout control device 200 on the back side of the gaming machine 10 (the number of discharged balls display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, the accessory ratio display unit 853). One or only two may be displayed. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one is displayed without displaying all of the number of balls to be discharged, a payout rate, and an accessory ratio. That is, any one of the discharged ball number display unit 66, the output ball rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 is omitted, or the discharged ball number display unit 851, the output ball rate display unit 852, and the accessory rate display unit 853. Any of these may be omitted. In addition, the number of 7-segment type indicators (LED lamps) is increased, and as the accessory ratio display unit 68, a first display unit that displays a continuous accessory ratio, and a commonly used so-called accessory ratio ( It is also possible to provide a second display unit that displays the ratio of all the combinations), and to display both the continuous combination ratio and the so-called combination ratio (total combination ratio) at the same time.

  In addition, the number of balls to be discharged, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses are held as information in the microcomputer (CPU) of the game control device 100 or the payout control device 200 of the gaming machine 10, and the display unit or display of the gaming machine 10 is displayed. The device 41 does not display the number of balls to be discharged, the rate at which the ball is played, and the ratio of the objects. (Of course, the number of balls to be ejected, the amount of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses may be output to an external device while being displayed on the display unit or display device 41 of the gaming machine 10).

  Further, as in the first and second embodiments, the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the bonus rate are determined by the user program in the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300. In addition to the calculation, the CPU of the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300 is provided with a calculation function (hardware calculation function), and a parameter is set in the internal register ( It is also possible to automatically calculate the number of balls to be discharged, the number of balls to be played, and the ratio of bonuses by, for example, setting the information every time a game ball is fired (discharged) or winning is detected.

  As a privilege when the total number of balls discharged from power-on exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5000) or when the number of executions of the variable display game since power-on exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 100) It is good also as a structure which displays a payout rate and an accessory ratio. In this way, there is a possibility that the operation of the gaming machine will increase immediately after the opening of the amusement store, etc., and it is possible to display an accurate bonus rate.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the accessory ratio is calculated with respect to the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present, May be calculated for the number of prize balls. For example, the predetermined period is a period related to one jackpot (from the normal gaming state before the jackpot to the end of the jackpot), or a period related to one consecutive Chang (Ranso) (from the normal gaming state before the jackpot). -Time saving (until the electric support is completely completed), and the accessory ratio may be calculated separately for each predetermined period.

  The production control device 300 receives the payout command (A1719) and the out ball detection command (A2017), and calculates the number of discharged balls, the number of balls to be played (the total of the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls), and the ratio of bonuses. May be. In this case, the production control device 300 may back up (store) the calculation results of the number of balls to be discharged, the ball payout rate, and the accessory ratio in the FeRAM 323 that can retain the stored contents even during a power failure. If it does in this way, after a power failure restoration (after power-on), the number of discharged balls, a payout rate, and an accessory ratio can be displayed on the display device 41 immediately. Also, in this case, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010), the effect control device 300 is selected by switching the calculation method of the ratio of the actors to be displayed on the display device 41 by selection by the player or the like. According to the calculation method, the accessory ratio may be calculated and displayed on the display device 41. As described above, the method for calculating the ratio of the prizes is only the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls obtained as a result of winning the prize money during the big hit state with respect to the total number of prize balls. However, it differs depending on whether or not to include the percentage (%) of the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the normal variable winning device 37 or the big winning opening in the small hit state.

  The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is obvious that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Game machine 30 Game board 30b Out port 32 Game area 35 General winning port 36 1st starting winning port (1st starting winning region)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special variation prize winning device 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
65 Out-ball detection switch 66 Discharged ball number display part 67 Out-going ball rate display part 68 Bonus ratio display part 100
200 Dispensing control device (dispensing control board)
300 Production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply

Claims (4)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a game and capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the game becomes a predetermined result,
A winning area that is provided in the gaming area and in which game balls can be won without conditions,
A variable winning device that is provided in the gaming area and that is activated when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that a gaming ball can be won;
When a game ball wins the winning area or the variable winning device, a payout control means capable of paying out the number of winning balls determined for each of the winning area and the variable winning device;
And a display unit capable of displaying a ratio of the number of prize balls paid out as a result of winning the variable prize device out of the total number of prize balls awarded. . In a gaming machine capable of executing a game and capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the game becomes a predetermined result,
A winning area that is provided in the gaming area and in which game balls can be won without conditions,
A variable winning device that is provided in the gaming area and that is activated when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that a gaming ball can be won;
When a game ball wins the winning area or the variable winning device, a payout control means capable of paying out the number of winning balls determined for each of the winning area and the variable winning device;
Counting means for counting the number of discharged balls, which is the number of game balls discharged from the gaming area;
And a display unit capable of displaying a total ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning the winning ball to the number of discharged balls. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game and capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the game becomes a predetermined result,
A winning area that is provided in the gaming area and in which game balls can be won without conditions,
A variable winning device that is provided in the gaming area and that is activated when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that a gaming ball can be won;
When a game ball wins the winning area or the variable winning device, a payout control means capable of paying out the number of winning balls determined for each of the winning area and the variable winning device;
Counting means for counting the number of fired balls, which is the number of game balls launched into the game area;
And a display unit capable of displaying a total ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning the winning ball to the number of balls to be fired. 4. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display unit is in a non-displaying state when the gaming machine is in a customer waiting state. 5.

Images